JP2016010479A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To execute a performance rich in variation and at the same time inhibit a decrease in amusement of a game without applying any loads of development working hours in a stage performance executed continuously over a plurality of times of variable performances.SOLUTION: A game machine includes notice lottery information storage means for storing notice lottery information for determining a notice performance mode based on predetermined information. The number of times of execution of notice is determined, a notice performance mode to be executed is selected from the notice lottery information based on the predetermined information in accordance with each determined number of times, and the selected notice performance mode is determined as corresponding notice for each number of times. Notice determined for each number of times is executed successively over a plurality of times of variations by a decorative pattern and a notice performance for suggesting reliability is executed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, when a game ball is received as a winning opening in a starting winning opening (starting opening), after obtaining a random number value, after displaying a decorative pattern for informing a lottery result (winning) based on the random number value If the lottery result (combination of decorative symbols) displayed by the variable display game is displayed as a winning combination when the variable display game is displayed in a stopped display, the closed prize winning holes and the big winning holes are normally displayed in a predetermined pattern. The mainstream is a gaming machine that generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing operations to increase the chance that the game medium is received at a prize winning opening etc. It has become.

  When it is determined that the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is a reach effect that is highly likely to be a big hit based on the information of the variation pattern, it is determined to perform a pseudo continuous variation effect, and the pseudo continuous variation When it is decided to perform the production, first, the type of reach (for example, Samurai Reach, Monkey Reach, Dog Reach, Momotaro Reach, Oni Reach) is specified. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, there are five types of reliability that indicate the level of possibility of being a big hit with respect to the type of reach, such as samurai, monkey, dog, Momotaro, and demon. It is set in advance, and the reliability of the production is indicated by suggestion display. The suggestion display can be changed to a suggestion display of a highly reliable production mode, with the reliability of the production mode selected in advance as an upper limit.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, five notice lottery tables having different reliability levels are prepared corresponding to the type of reach, and each notice lottery table is displayed in the production corresponding to the number of pseudo-reams. The order of the suggestion display of reliability is stored so that it can be developed.

JP 2013-005964 A

  However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 aims to develop the reliability of the suggestion display in the notice effect. For this purpose, it is necessary to have a plurality of notice lottery tables (five notice lottery tables). For this reason, a burden is imposed on development man-hours and development resources regarding the configuration of the plurality of preliminary lottery tables.

  In addition, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 suggests that the reliability of the suggestion effect can be developed during the pseudo continuous change effect, but the suggestion effect is determined and the notice lottery table is selected when the suggestion effect is determined. The development pattern of the production tends to be determined as one pattern. Therefore, depending on the player (a player who is familiar with the development pattern), the development pattern can be predicted when the suggestion effect is viewed, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is a stage effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable effects without burdening development man-hours. The purpose is to suppress a decrease in the fun of the game while making it possible to produce an effect that jumps to variations.

A gaming machine according to [Solution 1]
A start opening in which a game ball rolling down the game area can enter,
Display means for displaying decorative designs;
A variable display game execution means for executing a variable display game for stopping and displaying after changing the decorative design based on the reception of the game ball at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery in response to the reception of the game ball at the start port;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, specific game state generating means for generating a specific game state advantageous to the player;
An effect control means for controlling the effect along with the variable display game based on the reception of the game ball at the start opening,
In order to solve the above problems,
The production control means includes
Whether or not to perform a notice effect suggesting a reliability indicating the possibility of generating the specific gaming state across a plurality of variation effects by the decoration symbol in the variation display game based on a lottery result by the lottery means A notice effect determining means for determining
When the notice lottery information storage means storing the notice lottery information for determining the notice effect mode based on the predetermined information and the notice effect determining means decide to perform the notice effect, the number of times the notice is executed is determined. A means for determining the number of notices to be determined;
Corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-notice-notifying means, a notice effect mode to be executed is selected from the notice lottery information based on the predetermined information, and the selected notice effect mode is corresponded to the number of times. Notice effect mode determining means for determining;
A notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect indicating the reliability by sequentially executing notices determined corresponding to the number of times over a plurality of variation effects by the decorative design. ,
When determining the advance notice corresponding to the number of times, the advance notice effect mode determining means does not lower the reliability of the advance notice effect mode executed at a later number of times than the notice effect type executed at a later number of times. To determine the notice effect mode,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, in a stage effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuating effects, a variety of effects can be executed without burdening the development man-hours, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, abbreviate | omitting the left frame member, (b) is an exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which provided the guidance blade | wing in the site | part of the outer frame side lower hinge member, and opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame, (b) is an outer frame in embodiment of (a). It is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect, (c) is equipped with the guidance blade | wing of embodiment different from (a) and (b), and shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right direction production unit of FIG.43 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade | wing in a delivery device. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the taxiway opening / closing door of a form different from FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the start port unit of the front unit from the front upper, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the start port unit from back lower. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit of the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of the front unit from the front top, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back, and (c) is the perspective which looked at the attacker unit from back and bottom. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the center combination of a front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top movable production | generation unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top movement production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper decoration body unit of the back upper movable production | generation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper decoration body unit of the back upper movable production | generation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back top sub-decoration body in a back top movable decoration body unit. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back surface decoration body unit of a back surface movable production | presentation unit is a retracted position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back top decoration body unit of a back top movable production | presentation unit is a 1st appearance position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back top decoration body unit of a back top movable production | presentation unit is a 2nd appearance position. (A) is a front view which shows a part of internal mechanism of a back movable production | generation effect unit, (b) is the perspective view which looked at a part different from (a) in an internal mechanism from the front, (c) [FIG. 2] is the perspective view which looked at (b) from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a one part movement of the internal mechanism of a back top movable production | presentation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the main member which comprises the internal mechanism in a retracted position, (b) is a 1st transmission member rotating from the state of (a) to a 1st to-be-transmitted member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state by which transmission of rotation of this was started. (C) shows a state where the first transmitted member and the first transmitted member are further rotated from the state of FIG. 113 (b), and the back decorative unit is lowered from the retracted position toward the first appearance position. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is a state where the 1st to-be-transmitted member further rotates with the 1st transmitting member from the state of (c), the transmission of rotation to the 1st to-be-transmitted member is completed, and the back decoration unit is the 1st It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached | attained one appearance position. FIG. 114E shows a state in which the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114D further rotates and transmission of rotation to the second transmitted member is started. (F) is explanatory drawing which shows, and a 2nd to-be-transmitted body unit rotates from the state of (e) with a 2nd transmission member, and a back upper decoration body unit descend | falls from a 1st appearance position to a 2nd appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is rotating, rotating. FIG. 115 (g) shows a state in which the second receiving member rotates together with the second transmitting member from the state of FIG. 115 (f), and the back decorative unit rotates while further descending toward the second appearance position. (H) is an explanatory view, and (h) is a state where the second transmission member is further rotated together with the second transmission member from the state of (g), the transmission of the rotation to the second transmission member is finished, and the back decorative unit is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached | attained the 2nd appearance position by half-rotating, falling from the state of the 1st appearance position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production | presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production | presentation unit of a back unit from the back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the back bottom front 1st decoration body and back bottom front 2nd decoration body from the front in the state of a normal retracted position, and (b) is back bottom front It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front in the state of an appearance position the back lower front 1st decoration body and the back lower front 2nd decoration body of a movable production | presentation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back right movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back right movable production unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit showing the first decorative surface of the back-right rotated decorative body facing the front, and (b) is the shutter of the back-right rotated decorative body opened in (a). (C) is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit shown in a state where the second decorative surface of the back-right rotation decorative body is directed to the front, (d) ) Is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit showing the third decorative surface of the back-right rotating decorative body facing the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the back left movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which orient | assigned the 1st decoration surface of the back left rotation decoration body to the front, (b) is the 2nd decoration surface of a back left rotation decoration body in the front. (C) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown with the third decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing the front, d) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state where the back left protruding decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is set as the appearance position in the state of (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in Fig.122 (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit of the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the back direction movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the movable production | reproduction unit behind back, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit when a back lower back rotation decoration unit is a falling end position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit when a back bottom rotation decoration unit is a raise end position from the front. (A) is a front view of the rear back movable movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back bottom rear rotating decorative body unit of the back lower rear movable effect unit, and (c) is the back bottom. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower back rotation decoration body unit of the back movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back rotation decoration body unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back rotation decoration body unit, and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in Fig.129 (a). (A) is a front view which shows the state which the back bottom back rotation decoration body of the back bottom back rotation decoration body has stopped rotating, (b) is a front view counterclockwise direction of a back bottom rotation decoration body. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating, (c) is a front view which shows a state just before a rotation decoration body is opened and rotated in the front view clockwise direction, and (d) is a back bottom It is a front view which shows the state which the back rotation decoration body is rotating in the clockwise direction of a front view. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the drive mechanism which concerns on a back bottom back rotation decoration body unit in a back bottom back rotation decoration body unit, (b) is the differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a back bottom back rotation decoration body unit. (C) is a configuration of a connecting mechanism that connects a drive mechanism related to a back-under-rear and rear rotation drive motor and a differential mechanism related to a rotary damper in the back-and-back rear rotation decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing shown. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a back lower back rotation ornamental body is closed and has stopped rotation, (b) is a back bottom back rotation ornamental body rotated in the counterclockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism at the time of being. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a back rotation decoration body is closed and the rotation stop is carried out, (b) is the back when the connection ring of a drive mechanism rotates in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a lower back rotation decoration body is opening, (c) is the connection ring of a drive mechanism rotating further in the clockwise direction, and a back lower back rotation decoration body is completely It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when it opens, (d) of a connection mechanism when the back bottom back rotation decoration body of the open state is rotating clockwise with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 2nd unit in a back four corner movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 2nd unit in a back four corner movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable production unit in the normal retracted position state, and (b) is the back four corner first in the state where the back four corner first decorative body is in the appearance position. It is a front view of a unit, and (c) is a front view of a back four corner first unit in the state where a back four corner second decoration object appears. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism when a back four corner 1st decoration body is a retracted position in a back four corner 1 unit from the left side, (b) is a back four corner first in a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body from an evacuation position to an appearance position from a left side, (c) is a drive mechanism when a back four corner first decoration body is an appearance position in a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state from the left side. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism when a back four corner 2nd decoration body is a retracted position in a back four corner 1 unit from a left side, (b) is a back four corner second in a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of the decoration body from the retracted position to the appearance position from the left side, and (c) is the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decoration body is the appearance position in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state from the left side. It is a front view of the game board which shows a motion of the surface movable decoration body of the surface movable production | presentation unit in a center actor. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the back appearance decoration body of the back top movable production | presentation unit in a back unit in the 1st appearance position. The back upper decorative body of the back movable movable unit in the back unit is in the second appearance position, and the back lower front first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable directive unit are in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows. A pair of shutters are open with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the first decoration of the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board showing the state of the appearance position of the back left protruding decorative body with the surface facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable production unit in the back unit, and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable production unit with the respective second decoration surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows a back right rotation decoration object of a back right movable production unit in a back unit, and a back left rotation decoration object of a back left movement production unit in the state where each 3rd decoration surface turned to the front. It is a front view of the game board showing a state where the back-under-bottom after-rotation decorative body of the back-under-back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated counterclockwise at the rising end position. In the back unit, the back and back rotating decorative body of the back and bottom movable effect unit is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front at the rising end position, and the back four corner second decorative body of the back and four corner movable effect unit is at the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner 1st decoration body of the back four corner movable production | presentation unit in a back unit in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) A jackpot determination table used for the lottery process for the big hit, and (B) a symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is explanatory drawing shown about an example of a battle effect. It is explanatory drawing shown about an example of a battle effect. It is explanatory drawing shown about an example of a battle effect. It is the front view of the game board which cut | disconnected the front structural member and the front unit in the approximate center of the front-back direction in the game area | region. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing only the main part by cutting along the line HH in (a). It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the top large winning opening vicinity in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation number display in the display panel of a center liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold | maintenance change effect using the hold number display in the display panel of a center liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the pending | holding change effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the pending | holding change effect of FIG. The hold change effect of this example, the change in the display color of the hold image that is the target of the effect, and the display color of the hold image that is the target of the effect that changes the display position with the digestion of the hold memory are schematically represented. It is a time chart. 168 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in connection with the hold storage as each process in the effect control process in step S602 of FIG. 168. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding number designation | designated command processing which peripheral control MPU performs. FIG. 183 is a continuation of the flowchart in FIG. 183. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding change effect determination process which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding change effect process which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the pending | holding image shift process which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a figure which shows each table, memory | storage area, and processing operation required in order that peripheral control MPU may perform each process in connection with pending | holding memory | storage. 158 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a first start port passing process (second embodiment) executed by the main control MPU of the main control board instead of the first start port passing process of FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a second start port passing process (second embodiment) executed by the main control MPU of the main control board instead of the second start port passing process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the prefetch determination process which main control MPU performs. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a big hit, (B) is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a loss reach. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table used at the time of disconnection. It is a time chart which represents typically the pseudo | simulation fluctuation | variation by a decoration pattern, and the notice effect accompanying a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation. It is a figure which shows a specific example of a notice effect, Comprising: It is a figure which shows an example of a notice effect using the display panel of a center liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the level of the reliability of the notice (serif) in a notice effect, and the notice effect lottery distribution table used for determination of the notice (line) in a notice effect. (A) is a flowchart which shows each process which the periphery control MPU performs in connection with a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation as each process of the production | presentation control processes of step S602 of FIG. (B) is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in relation to the pseudo continuous variation as each process as the second embodiment of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168. (C) is a flowchart showing a process executed by the peripheral control MPU in connection with the update of the random number for notice determination in the third embodiment as one process of the random number update process in step S606 of FIG. 168. (D) is a figure showing an example of the frequency | count determination table memorize | stored in ROM (not shown). It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 1 which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the notice determination process which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the notification effect process which the periphery control MPU performs. It is a figure which shows each random number counter, each table, each storage area, and processing operation | movement required for the periphery control MPU to perform each process in connection with a notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 2 which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the notification effect determination process 3 which peripheral control MPU performs in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the notice determination process 2 which peripheral control MPU performs in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the notification effect process 2 which peripheral control MPU performs in 3rd Embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board accommodated in the payout control board box 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout apparatus 830 are guided downward. And an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200, and the payout unit base 801 A game ball which is attached to the lower end and is released from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 is guided forward and released from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharged from the full tank discharge port. Lower full tank path unit having a full tank guide path that guides the played game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the full ball receiving port 530 of the door frame 3. Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. Interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and contains a payout control board that controls the dispensing of game balls. 950.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 A box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 that is attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and a table having a plurality of winning holes for receiving game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a. A knit (not shown) and a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board box 1200 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as an operator's finger when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes.
Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a that extends in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d.
When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size through which only one game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 vertically. And a discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42 by screws screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.
Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface in the left-right direction of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 16 and 17 show a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. FIG. The description will be given with reference. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock body 63 are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front protrusion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66 a only contacts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c.
As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG. FIG. 19 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame provided with guide vanes at the outer frame side lower hinge member, and FIG. 19 (b) is an outer view in the embodiment of FIG. It is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the frame, (c) is the state which provided the guide blade of embodiment different from (a) and (b), and opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame (D) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c).

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a risk of being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described configuration, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 or the like. In order to make it easy to perform, as shown in FIG. 19, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 may be provided with guide vanes 95 and 96 for guiding the game ball to the discharge hole 74 or the like.

  More specifically, the guide blade 95 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has a distal end protruding outward from the main body frame 4 and a base end side below the rear end of the left side surface of the main body frame 4. It is pivotally mounted around an axis extending vertically on the side, and is formed in a rod shape. The guide blade 95 is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to rotate counterclockwise in plan view. Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, the guide blade 95 is inclined slightly rearward from the right side with respect to the left side surface of the main body frame 4 with the main body frame 4 being opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The rotation end in the counterclockwise direction is restricted so as to protrude into the direction. Therefore, from this state, the guide blade 95 can be rotated so that the tip side moves backward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

  When the main body frame 4 is rotated from the state in which the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the leading end of the guide blade 95 contacts the right side surface of the rising portion 72 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. The guide blades 95 are in contact with each other and rotate in a direction (a clockwise direction in plan view) in which the distal end moves rearward around the proximal end side against the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Then, when the main body frame 4 is further rotated in the closing direction, the guide blade 95 is further rotated to a state in which it protrudes rearward from the main body frame 4, and the guide blade 95 is not disturbed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, the body frame 4 can be closed (see FIG. 19B).

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, if a game ball falls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 70, the guide blade 95 protrudes diagonally left rearward from the rear end of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be moved to the right side by the left side surface of the main body frame 4 and the guide vanes 95, and the game ball is moved to the rear side of the main body frame 4. While being able to suppress rolling, it is possible to guide the game ball to the discharge hole 74 by bringing the game ball to the right side, and to discharge the game ball from the discharge hole 74. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide blade 95 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view to the position shown in FIG. 19A by a biasing force of a spring (not shown). . Therefore, the guide blades 95 of this embodiment rotate (move) with the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4.

  On the other hand, the guide vane 96 shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at both ends as shown in the figure, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the fan-shaped bellows is folded when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide blades 96 move in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4, as with the guide blades 95 described above.

  The guide blade 96 is deployed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The fallen game balls can be guided by rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by the guide vanes 96, and from the discharge holes 74 and the right discharge holes 53 that are opened on the rear side of the main body frame 4. The game ball can be discharged downward. Therefore, the guide blade 96 can also prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  According to the present embodiment, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be guided to the discharge hole 74 by the guide vanes 95 and 96, so that the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 74 without increasing the discharge hole 74. It is possible to prevent the strength of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 from being reduced by increasing the size of the hole (discharge hole 74) penetrating the horizontal portion 71. Therefore, even if a tool for performing an illegal act is inserted between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has sufficient strength. 70 is difficult to be distorted, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and to prevent an illegal act from being performed.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, etc., is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a vertically long rectangle. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower portion of the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 A lower dish ball removing unit 320, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities of the game hall, An upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 that is attached to the center of the left and right sides of the front surface of 360 and bulges forward. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502 so as to be rotatable as shown in FIGS. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and is attached to the handle main body 502 to detect the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor attached to the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 25, 26, 55 to 57, etc., the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit main body that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has the front side open. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and the box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for discharging the game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball that has entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism that switches between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 27 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit touch unit as seen from above and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit button unit as seen from above and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 40 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the section BB in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is an effect operation in the section CC in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the lower right door production unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the lower right door production unit, and FIG. 44 (a) shows the lower right door production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right direction production unit from back. 45 is a DD cross-sectional view of the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. 43 (b). 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the back. FIG. 50A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit with the door lower right rotating body facing forward, and FIG. 50B is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing rear.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 51 (b) is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges greatly forward, and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper plate body 212 of the dish unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A, which are attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 in the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, as shown in FIGS. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 that is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and an upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 42). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped taper portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 41). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through-hole 230a of the mounting base 231, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238.
By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the touch unit 220 </ b> B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from the upper side, A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 41) having a diameter that increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid enters the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the button unit 220C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the bottom surface of the disk-like main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253. A plurality of columnar light guides 255b.
The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Thus, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 41, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is assembled, and the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, the rendering operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to light-decorate the back plate decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends leftward and rightward, and has a left and right center that bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape that is opened rearward. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214.
The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

[3-1f. Door lower right production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 43 to 50, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between a door lower rotary body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) to be described later. .

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. And a heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  48 and 49, the rotating body internal unit 290 includes a disc-shaped door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 include a rotation position where the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 50A) and a rotation position where the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 50B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward according to the gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably, so that the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotated while the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical and transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical door lower right rotating body 270 </ b> A in the door lower right effect unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The production unit cover 300 has a translucent shape as a whole with a container shape opened at the rear. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

[3-1h. Upper dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through-hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by slider support portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 54 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 in a position where the opening 321a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 212 so as to be slidable to the left and right. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding protrusion 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding protrusion 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed.
In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding projection 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower plate 202 do not come out downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projections 322a are released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, etc., a unit case 331 which is attached to the upper surface near the right end in front view of the rendering operation unit 220 and has translucency. A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes a ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending operation unit 330 receives a predetermined number of game balls. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion and the prepaid card are returned after being drawn. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-1k. Top plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effects of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that is changed by driving in, a belt-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) It is possible to notice light from the outside of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to make the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get tired.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for other players to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind. An effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable by being looked at by other players and to reduce the interest, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting the effect by 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed and the production of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the production unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, the game operation area 5a is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to get into the eyes, and it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely paid attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the operation unit 200 entertained.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the position of the player's line of sight is any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 200 includes the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the upper plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air on the upper plate body 212 or the surface of the game ball. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B having the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with a variety of performances and to reduce interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed, and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the door frame foul cover unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear after the lid member is removed. FIG. 57 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the front side of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-like unit main body 522 that is open on the front side. A flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view and passes through the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. A full sphere receiving port 528 that opens toward the rear on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 in the front view and communicates with the full guide path 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4; It has.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is opened upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 that are opened forward in the lower right corner when viewed from the front are released. And a ball discharge port 532 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the ball discharge port 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width, a plate-shaped movable piece 534 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, and a movable A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects the rotation of the piece 534 away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 that biases the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 has a certain amount in the storage passage 533 when the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side. The number of game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game ball, The rotation is detected by a full tank detection sensor 535. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and urged to eliminate the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the through ball passage 526, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 80). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway door member 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guide path opening / closing section 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact section 537, the guide path door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 58 to 61, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame 4 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 as viewed from the front, and a front-rear side of the launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side when viewed from the front. And the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and the bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates back and forth from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the lower left side. And a circular speaker opening 607 that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 602 and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 to the front. And.

  Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is attached to the rear end to be rotatable. The rear extension part 608 is provided. The main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and an upper hinge mounting portion 609 and a lower hinge for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to be pivoted to a position slightly below the left side of the front and right center of the game board mounting portion 602, And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge main body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 up and down, and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 is passed through. A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for axial support, and a door frame extending upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame lower hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of 3. .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The main body side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58, 60 and 61. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the game ball driving strength changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launcher 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with the strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 520 to the foul ball receiving port 530, passes through the foul cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape protruding forward from the lower part of the unit base 701 from the front side And a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 according to the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from behind. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 71A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 71B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. FIG. 72A is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 72B is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is. FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the payout blade in the payout device.

  Fig. 74 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 75 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 76 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 76 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 79A is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 79B is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is opened. . FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view showing a guideway opening / closing door according to an embodiment different from those shown in FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and an upper portion of the payout unit base 801. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows in the front and rear directions by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 82) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950; It is equipped with. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guiding path 861 for guiding the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank ball receiving port 530, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged in the body frame And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends passing through the partition plate 823 to the front case 821 and the rear race 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively. The ball breakage detection sensor 827 is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is opened at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c coincide with each other in a state where the ball guide unit 820 is assembled. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827.
That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827.
That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and rear directions by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a line. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 82). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight or the like.

In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 825 are movable. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the single member 826 is detected by one single ball break detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the front of the movable piece 825 Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece rear 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the ball break detection sensor 827. .
Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a can be changed depending on the weight of the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member 826 by its own weight and the weight. 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be obtained. Or the like does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided with an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude to the inside. As the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening that is open at the front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open to allow the game ball to pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass through in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the bottom on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 whose end passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are paid. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game balls that have flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved forward and backward between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c, and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed approximately 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 73).
That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can.
In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 with the dispensing device 830 assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively.
Further, the payout vanes 839 are arranged at portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 62). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 contacts the outer periphery of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d. Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface bent in a square shape of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843c A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 72) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. It touches. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 72A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 61 (b)). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 381e and 832e by the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b is It is located directly under the ball outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower bulb guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 82).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and released downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game ball stored on the upper side of the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e and sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full-ball path unit 850 automatically removes the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 according to the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front and guiding it from the front end to the full tank reception port 530 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere.
The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. The contact with the boss 867a protruding forward restricts the clockwise rotation.

In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the through ball path 526, the full tank reception port 530, and the door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 80).
Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 79). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding are not performed. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, and the operation is performed. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 79B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. A through ball passage 526 and a full tank reception port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has a larger number of game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of game balls to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 is provided. Game balls are stored in the storage passage 533. And when the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 by storing the game ball in the storage passage 533, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 relative to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In such a state, the number can be filled in the storage passage 533 on the upstream side, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860, and the upper ball storage path 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, in a gaming state where a lot of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are released by the payout of the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and have fun.

  Thus, in the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls can be stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860 than in the conventional pachinko machine. When a large number of game balls are stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860 when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the frame 4, the load of these game balls is normally guided. This greatly acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 closing the front end opening of the road 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and the guideway opening / closing door 863 may be easily damaged. Therefore, the guideway opening / closing door 870 of the embodiment as shown in FIG. 81 may be used.

  A guide path opening / closing door 870 shown in FIG. 81 has a disc-shaped base portion 870a that is rotatably attached, and a first door that extends obliquely from the base portion 870a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guide path 861. A plate portion 870b, a second door plate portion 870c extending rightward from the base portion 870a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extension extending obliquely from the base portion 870a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. A protruding portion (not shown) and an operating protrusion 870e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3. ing. In addition, the guideway opening / closing door 870 includes a plurality of recesses 870 into which a part of the game ball fits on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c.

The rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c of the guideway opening / closing door 870 are inclined so as to move backward as the distance from the base portion 870a increases, as illustrated.
Therefore, when the game ball that has rolled forward in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 contacts the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b or the second door plate portion 870c, the inclination of the rear surface causes It will roll to the base part 870a side, and the game ball stored in the normal guiding path 861 or the full tank guiding path 862 can be brought close to the base part 870a side. Thereby, the load of the game ball stored in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 is applied to the base portion 870a attached to the lower case 867 in the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Since it acts at a close position, the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c can be made difficult to be deformed, and the guideway opening / closing door 870 is hardly damaged and durability can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the plurality of recesses 870d of the guideway opening / closing door 870 are held at the positions where the game balls approach the base 870a side on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Are arranged as follows. As a result, the game ball that has circulated in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 is fitted into the recess 870d, so that the game ball can be surely moved to the base 870a side, and the same as described above. An effect can be produced.

  Although not shown, the recess 870d extends in an arc shape with the base 870a as the center so that the guideway opening / closing door 870 can rotate even when a game ball is fitted.

  In this case, it is desirable that the left and right widths W of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 be different from an integral multiple of the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls abutting on the rear side with respect to the game balls brought closer to the base 870a side by the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c are the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path. If it is in contact with the inner walls on the left and right outer sides of the 862, the direction of the load acting from the rear game ball is directed obliquely forward toward the base 870a side, and the load is applied to the base 870a side attached to the case 867. As a result, the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. Interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and contains a payout control board that controls the dispensing of game balls. 950.

  The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board accommodated in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from behind. Further, FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. FIG. 89 is a perspective view seen from the front showing only the front structural member and the game panel in the game board, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view seen from the rear showing only the front structural member and the game panel in the game board.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when a player operates a handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel 1100 A central liquid crystal display device 1500 attached to the rear side so as to be visible from the front side, a peripheral control unit 1600 attached to the rear side of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open are different from the plurality of general winning holes 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a game ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received in accordance with the normal lottery result lottered and the first lot selected by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 In accordance with the special lottery result or the second special lottery result, there is provided a lower major prize opening 2005 and an upper major prize opening 2006 that allow the reception of game balls.

  Also, a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 attached at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a and having a first start port 2002, and an inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in front view. A side unit 2200 having a plurality of general winning ports 2001 and a right general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, and a second starting port that are mounted to the right of the starting port unit 2100. 2004 and an attacker unit 2300 having a lower prize-winning opening 2005, and a frame shape having an upper prize-winning opening 2006 attached above the starter opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300. The center role 2500 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like back box 3010 that is open at the front, and a lock for removably attaching the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a lower left ball passage unit 3030 attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a right lower ball passage unit 3040 attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010 are provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board 3060 attached to the rear side of the opening 3010a on the rear face of the back box 3010, a lamp drive board cover 3061 covering the back of the lamp drive board 3060, and the back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 attached to the rear surface below the opening 3010a in the rear view, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear face of the back box 3010 attached to the lower left corner in the rear view. Panel relay substrate 3064.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper and left sides at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable production unit attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back bottom front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached in the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a. The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 Moveable directing unit 3500 after the back, and the movable back directing unit 3100 within the back box 3010 and moveable after the back A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided. The stop portion 1006 functions as a buffer member that relaxes and softens the momentum of the game ball that is driven into the game area 5a, and is formed of rubber or the like in this example. The material of the stopper 1006 is not limited to rubber as long as it functions as a buffer member.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of attachment ports 1112 (see FIG. 89, FIG. 90, etc.) penetrating forward and backward to attach the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 so as to be detachable from the rear side. The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of attachment holes and positioning holes for attaching the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In a state where the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a can be guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding unit 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 87) can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board and is attached to the board holder 1200. I have.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by looking at the opening and closing traces, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized actions on the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has two status indicators that display a gaming status and a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball to the gate portion described later. A lottery was drawn by accepting a game symbol in the first starting port, which will be described later, and a normal symbol display device consisting of LEDs, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate part A first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special retention number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the reception of game balls to the first starting port; , A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving a game ball at the second starting port, which will be described later, and a game ball accepting person at the second starting port When the second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, etc. And a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern is repeated (number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Central liquid crystal display]
Next, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000.
More specifically, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 includes two left fixed pieces 1501 projecting outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece projecting outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. 1502. This central liquid crystal display device 1500 has a back box in two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixed pieces 1501 obliquely from 3010, the right fixed piece 1502 side is moved forward, the right fixed piece 1502 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is slid downward. Thus, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1600 is attached to the rear surface of central liquid crystal display device 1500. Although not shown, the peripheral control unit 1600 displays a peripheral control board that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board, and an effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. An image display control board to be controlled, a ROM board having a ROM storing production images, production sounds, production control programs, and the like, and a peripheral housing the peripheral control board, the image display control board, and the ROM board And a control board box 1620.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the starter unit of the front unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the starter unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 94A is a perspective view of the front unit as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 94B is a perspective view of the side unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 95 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the attacker unit as viewed from the front and top, (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the back and up, and (c) is the rear view of the attacker unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the attachment port 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 The lower special winning opening 2005 and the upper large winning opening 2006 are provided that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged on the right side in the game area 5a from the center in the vertical direction to the lower side. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The lower prize winning opening 2005 is arranged near the lower end portion in the game area 5a below the second start opening 2004. The upper prize winning opening 2005 is arranged near the upper end portion in the game area 5a above the second start opening 2004.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left side of the start port unit 2100 in front view. The side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality (three in this case) of general winning ports 2001, and is attached to the right side of the starting port unit 2100, and one general winning is received. An attacker unit 2300 having a port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second start port 2004, and a lower prize-winning port 2005, and is mounted above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a big prize opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110, a ball receiving member 2102 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 2101 and protruding forward to form a first start port 2002, A box-shaped front decoration base 2103 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102 and protrudes forward and extends left and right, and the front surface of the unit base 2101 in the front decoration base 2103 And a front center decorative substrate 2104 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  Further, the start port unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the front decoration base 2103 and has a front decoration member 2105 that has a predetermined decoration and is lit and decorated by the front center decoration board 2104, and the rear side of the unit base 2101. And a guide passage member 2106 for guiding the game ball received in the first start opening 2002 downward, and a game ball attached to the guide passage member 2106 and received in the first start opening 2002 are detected. A first start port sensor 2107.

The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear, and can receive a game ball from above as the first start port 2002 and guide it backward. The front decoration base 2103 extends evenly to the left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first start port 2002), and is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 extends left and right, and has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape with substantially the same size and shape as a lower large prize opening door member 2352 that opens and closes a lower big prize opening 2005 described later. ing.
By this fake part 2105a, the player can have an illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and is attached to the vicinity of the upper edge of the lower portion of the front surface of the unit base 2201. The two first ball receiving members 2202 projecting forward and forming a general winning opening 2001, and attached to the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 2201, and projecting forward to the general winning opening A second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, a side decorative substrate 2204 disposed behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the side decorative substrate 2204 so as to cover from the rear. A board cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. In addition, the unit base 2201 has a first shelf 2201a that is inclined leftward and lower to the left and above the part where the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached, It has a projecting portion 2201b projecting to the back. The unit base 2201 has translucency and is decorated with light emission by the side decorative substrate 2204.

The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear, and can receive a game ball from above as a general winning opening 2001 and can guide it backward.
The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and has a second shelf 2203 a that is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right on the upper surface, and a lower portion of the second shelf 2203 a. And a ball receiving portion 2203b that opens to the upper left side and forms a general winning opening 2001.

  The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open at the front, and is opened upward to a portion that is behind the ball receiving portion 2203b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and the second ball receiving member 2203. And has a bowl-shaped guiding portion 2205a for guiding the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the board cover 2205 is inserted into the attachment port 1112, and the game ball received in the general winning port 2001 is paneled by the guide unit 2205a. It can be guided behind the plate 1112.

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The attacker unit 2300 is disposed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a lower large winning port 2005. Specifically, the second start opening 2004 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the gate portion 2003 is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. A lower prize winning port 2005 is arranged below the second starting port 2004. The lower grand prize winning port 2005 extends to the left and right from the position immediately below the second start opening 2004 to the left beyond the position directly below the general winning hole 2001.

  The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate part 2003, and is attached to the panel base plate 1110 from the front and a unit base 2301 attached to the front upper part of the unit base 2301. The front opening member 2302 to be decorated, the shelf member 2303 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2301 between the front opening member 2302 and the lower prize winning port 2005 and projects forward, and the unit base 2301 A ball guide member 2304 for guiding a game ball received on the second start port 2004, which is attached to the rear side, and a gate sensor 2305, which is attached to the unit base 2301 and detects the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, It is equipped with.

  Further, the attacker unit 2300 is disposed at a portion corresponding to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and between the front opening member 2302 and the shelf member 2303, and a lower attacker decorative board 2306 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A substrate cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 so as to cover the back of the lower attacker decorative board 2306, and a grid frame-shaped light shield attached between the lower attacker decorative board 2306 and the unit base 2301. And a member (not shown).

  Further, the attacker unit 2300 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and is provided with a second starting port unit 2320 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and is connected to the lower prize winning port 2005. And a lower large prize opening unit 2350 that opens and closes.

  The unit base 2301 has a gate portion 2003 protruding forward from the upper end portion, and one general winning port 2001 protruding forward from a lower left portion of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front. Further, the unit base 2301 includes a bowl-shaped bowl portion 2301a that guides a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward. This unit base 2301 has translucency.

  The start port front member 2302 includes a pair of side wall portions 2302a (see FIG. 175 (a)) extending forward along the left and right sides of the second start port 2004, and an upper end of the left side wall portion 2302a in front view. A guiding portion 2302b extending so as to become higher toward the left side, and a flat plate-like outer wall portion 2302c extending forward from a side wall portion 2302a on the right side when viewed from the front with a distance allowing a game ball to pass to the right. A pair of side wall portions 2302a, a guiding portion 2302b, and a flat front plate portion 2302d connecting the front ends of the outer wall portions 2302c. The left end of the guiding portion 2302b extends further to the left than the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a) and the like, the shelf member 2303 has an upper surface extending from a position immediately below the right side wall 2302a of the start port front member 2302 to a position immediately below the center of the left and right of the general winning opening 2001 so that the left end is lowered. ing. As a result, when a game ball rolls on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and is released from the left end when the lower major prize opening 2005 is in the open state, it is accepted into the lower major prize opening 2005 with a very high probability. The ball guide member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the game ball received in the second start port 2004 between the second start port unit 2320 and the lower large prize port unit 2350 behind the unit base 2301. It is formed so as to be discharged downward after being guided rearward from the unit 2350.

  The second start port unit 2320 includes a front case 2321 having a second start port 2004 opened at the front end and attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301, and a rear case 2322 attached to the rear side of the front case 2321. After the second start port door member 2323 and the second start port door member 2323 are slid forward and backward, the front case 2321 is supported so as to be able to slide forward and backward so as to protrude forward from the second start port 2004. A start opening solenoid 2324 attached in the case 2322 and a second start opening sensor 2325 which is attached so as to be sandwiched between the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detects a game ball received in the second start opening 2004. And.

  In the state where the second starter unit 2320 is assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the front end of the front case 2321 passes through the unit base 2301 from the rear side and is positioned substantially on the same plane as the front surface of the unit case 2301. Thereby, the 2nd starting port 2004 is opened toward the front. In a normal state where the start port solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second start port door member 2323 is immersed in the front case 2321, and the game ball flowing down in front of the second start port 2004 is the second start port. Without entering 2004, it passes through the second starting port 2001 and flows downward. On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 2324 is energized, the second start port door member 2323 projects forward from the second start port 2004. In this state, when a game ball flows down in front of the second start port 2004, the game ball comes into contact with the second start port door member 2323 and the flow direction changes from the lower side to the rear side. Accepted. The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2325 and then guided to the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward.

  The lower major prize opening unit 2350 is a unit case 2351 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and that has a rectangular lower major prize opening 2005 that is open to the left and right on the front, and the lower major prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A horizontally-long rectangular plate-like lower prize-winning door member 2352 that is pivotally attached to 2351, and a lower-large prize-winning door member 2352 that is attached inside the unit case 2351 and is driven to open and close depending on the gaming state. Lower large prize opening solenoid 2353, a lower large prize opening sensor 2354 that is attached to the unit case 2351 and detects a game ball received in the lower large prize opening 2005, and is attached to the lower surface of the unit case 2351. Lower large prize opening decoration board 2355 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and lower large prize opening solenoid 235 Includes inferior vena winning hole sensors 2354, starting opening the solenoid 2324, and a second start hole sensor 2325 or the like, the attacker unit relay board 2356 relaying the connection between the main control board, the.

  The lower university winning opening 2005 is open forward. The lower big prize opening door member 2352 capable of opening and closing the lower big prize opening 2005 is attached so that the left and right ends of the lower side can be rotated by the unit case 2351, and the upper side moves so as to move forward and downward. By doing so, the lower prize winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  In the lower prize winning unit 2350, the lower prize winning door member 2352 stands upright and closes the lower prize winning port 2005 in a normal state where the lower prize winning solenoid 2353 is not energized. When the lower big prize opening solenoid 2353 is energized according to the gaming state, the lower big prize opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. That is, the lower big prize opening door member 2352 is inclined so as to become higher from the lower side of the lower big prize opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the lower prize winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the lower prize winning opening door member 2352, the inclination of the lower prize winning opening door member 2352 changes the flow direction from below to the rear. It will be accepted into the Shimodai prize opening 2005. The game balls received in the lower major prize opening 2005 are detected by the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351.

[5-8d. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front through the frame. The center accessory 2500 has an upper prize winning opening 2006 that allows a game ball to be received according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the center accessory 2500 has a part of the lower side extending downward between the start port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004. That is, the center accessory 2500 divides the game area 5a to the left and right.

  The center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2511 and a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the attachment port 1112 that is largely open at the center of the panel plate 1112. A frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that prevents entry of game balls into the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the mounting port 1112. 2510.

  The front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The position of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 that is slightly to the left from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side is the highest.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 enters a warp inlet 2520 in which the game ball in the game area 5a is open on the outer peripheral surface of the lower left side when viewed from the front on the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510, and the warp inlet 2520. The warp passage 2521 for guiding the game ball to the vicinity of the left end in front of the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510, the warp outlet 2523 opening the game ball at the downstream end of the warp passage 2521, and the warp outlet 2523 A stage 2530 that allows the game ball released from the ball to roll, extends to the left and right along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510, and discharges the supplied game ball into the game area 5a. ing.

  The stage 2530 is curved such that the left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of the portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the space between the lowest portions is bulged to be slightly higher. Yes. This stage 2530 is formed in a portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and is formed in a center guide groove 2531 cut out from the front end to the rear and two lowest portions, respectively. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 that decreases toward the left and expands to the left and right. In the assembled state of the game board 5, the first starting port 2002 is located immediately below the central guide groove 2531, and the game balls released from the central guide groove 2531 into the game area 5a are first with a very high probability. It is received in the start port 2002.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the right end portion of the front side wall portion 2512 on the front side when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball that bounces back against the stop portion 1006 to roll in the direction of the upper game space 2541 described later. Part 2540. The guide portion 2540 is formed as a member different from the center accessory 2500 and is attached to the center accessory 2500 to extend the right end portion in front view of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in the right direction in front view. In addition, the guide portion 2540 is formed of a resin having a stronger strength than the center accessory 2500. Specifically, the center accessory 2500 is formed of a PC resin (polycarbonate resin), while the guide portion 2540 is formed of a POM resin (polyacetal resin) that is more durable than the PC resin.

  As described above, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a come into contact with the stop portion 1006, the game balls loosen their momentum, but some of the game balls are moved by the stop portion 1006 to the front peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500. It is rebounded in the upper side direction of the portion 2512. Further, in order to bring the game ball into contact with the stop portion 1006, most players turn the handle lever 504 to the maximum to drive the game ball, so that the momentum of the game ball to be launched is directed to the first start port 2002. It is stronger than normal games aimed at winning a prize. Then, when the game ball hit in this way is bounced back by the stop portion 1006, the center accessory 2500 may be damaged due to frequent drops on the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. For this reason, the right end portion in front view of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is attached to the center accessory 2540 as a separate guide portion 2540 and is formed of a highly durable POM resin to prevent the center accessory 2540 from being damaged. ing. In this example, not all the center actors 2540 are formed of POM resin, but only the guide portion 2540 is formed of POM resin. Therefore, even if the guide portion 2540 is damaged, only the guide portion 2540 is replaced. Can be repaired easily, and can be easily repaired in case of breakage.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the guide portion 2540 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to have a step with the front peripheral wall portion 2512. In this example, it is attached so that the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is above the upper side of the guide portion 2540 in front view. As a result, when the game ball bounced back by the stopper 1006 reaches this step, it is returned to the upper game space 2541 without exceeding the step. In addition, the friction coefficient of the upper side of the guide portion 2540 is low due to the smooth mirror finish, and the game ball that could not exceed the step between the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the guide portion 2540 is quickly flowed down to the upper game space 2541. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging due to the game ball staying on the upper side of the guide portion 2540.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the upper side of the guide portion 2540 is formed by a three-dimensional member that is longer than the right side (left and right sides). The upper side of the guide portion 2540 requires a certain length to receive the game ball bounced back by the hitting portion 1006, but the space in the game area 5a can be made by making the upper side and the right side (left and right sides) comparable. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine decreases. Therefore, by forming the right side (left and right sides) of the guiding portion 2540 shorter than the upper side, a space in the up and down direction of the game area 5a is secured so as not to reduce the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

  The center accessory 2500 is sandwiched between the guiding portion 2540 and the stop portion 1006, and an upper right entrance where the game balls in the game area 5a are open to be able to enter, and an upper side of the center base 2510 below the upper right entrance. The upper game space 2541 having a predetermined size with the upper prize winning opening 2006 opened on the left side when viewed from the front, and the right edge of the center base 2510 from the right end when viewed from the front at the bottom of the upper game space 2541 A right passage 2542 in which the lower end is bent to the left and the game ball can circulate, and a lower right exit 2543 that opens downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542 is provided. .

  The upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the upper portion extends upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed in such a size that the game ball can sufficiently move in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. In the upper game space 2541, an upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened to the left of the front view from the upper right entrance. Further, the upper game space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a that is inclined so as to become lower rightward when viewed from the front just below the upper right entrance. The guide portion 2541a smoothly guides the game ball that has dropped through the upper right entrance to the right passage 2542 by rolling along the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541 without jumping up in the upper game space 2541. Can be made.

  The right passage 2542 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2542a extending in the left and right directions on the front and rear wall surfaces alternately in the vertical direction. Can be attenuated. The lower right exit 2543 is opened immediately above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted between the lower right exit 2543 and the gate portion 2003 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110).

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has an upper prize port door member 2550 that closes the upper prize port 2006, and an upper prize port solenoid 2551 that opens and closes the upper prize port door member 2550 according to the gaming state. The upper prize winning hole sensor 2552 for detecting the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006, and the rear guiding path 2553 for guiding the game ball detected by the upper prize winning hole sensor 2552 to the rear of the flange portion 2511 ( 175), a rear discharge port 2554 that is open at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 and through which a game ball can pass, and is branched from the middle of the rear guide path 2553, and is on the right side of the center base 2510 in front view. An escape passage 2555 that guides the game ball downward along, and a discharge port 2556 that opens at the lower end of the escape passage.

  The upper prize-winning door member 2550 opens and closes the upper prize-winning hole 2006 that opens to the left in front of the upper right entrance in the upper game space 2541. The upper prize-winning door member 2550 is attached to the lower end to the left of the upper right entrance so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth in the vicinity of the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541. It extends to the ceiling of the upper game space. The upper prize winning opening door member 2550 stands upright in a normal state, and closes the upper prize winning opening 2006. Then, when the upper prize winning solenoid 2551 is energized according to the gaming state, the upper prize opening 2006 is rotated so that the upper end moves to the right when viewed from the front and the game ball can be received. Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper grand prize opening door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is located further to the right in front view than the upper right entrance. Accordingly, the game ball that has passed through the upper right entrance and dropped onto the upper prize winning door member 2550 is guided by the upper prize winning door member 2550 and accepted into the upper prize winning port 2006.

  The game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper prize winning opening sensor 2552 disposed at the lower left of the upper prize winning opening door member 2550, and then is behind the flange portion 2551 by the rear guiding path 2553. Be guided. The rear discharge port 2554 that is open at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 is usually defined by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Accordingly, when the game ball is not released from the rear discharge port 2554, the game ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched immediately before the rear release port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the release passage 2555. .

  The center accessory 2500 includes a front movable effect unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a lower movable effect unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The front movable production unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is mounted in a frame of the center base 2510 so as to be movable up and down, and has a front movable decoration body 2561 that is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, A front movable decorative body decorative board (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and in a gaming state And an upper surface driving motor 2563 that moves the upper surface movable decorative body 2561 up and down.

  The front and lower movable effect unit 2570 is attached to a portion extending downward from the stage 2530 on the lower side of the center base 2510, and has a translucent front surface with a decoration on the front surface. The lower decorative body 2571, the first rotational decorative body 2572, the second rotational decorative body 2573, and the third rotational decorative body 2574 that are rotatably attached to the front of the front and lower decorative bodies 2571, and the center base 2510 A lower drive motor 2575 that is attached to the side and rotates the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 according to the gaming state, and the rear side of the lower decorative body 2571 And a front and lower movable decorative body decoration board 2576 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  In the lower movable production unit 2570, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 are formed in a shape imitating a shuriken, and driven by the lower drive motor 2575. , Each rotating in the same direction.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the rear unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit when the main unit is disassembled and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the liquid crystal display device 1500 and a game ball attached to the lower left front end of the back box 3010 and received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 are guided downward. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 that discharges onto the holder 1200, and the game ball that is attached to the lower right front end of the back box 3010 and is received in the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the upper large winning port 2006 are received. A discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 in the back right / left movable effect unit 3300 described later. A lower right ball passage unit 3040 for guiding the game ball discharged from the outlet and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2556 of the escape passage 2555 of the center object 2500 downward and releasing it onto the substrate holder 1200, and a lower left ball passage And a general winning opening sensor 3050 that is attached to each of the unit 3030 and the lower right ball passage unit 3040 and detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a. The back unit 3000 drives each decorative board based on the control command from the peripheral control board, and the lamp drive. A lamp driving board cover 3061 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the back of the board 3060, and a control command from the peripheral control board attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a in the rear view. A motor drive board 3062 for driving each drive motor based on the motor drive board, a motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the back of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear view on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is installed in the lower left corner and relays the connection between the main control board and each prize opening sensor and each prize opening solenoid. That the panel relay board 3064, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper and left sides at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable production unit attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back bottom front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached in the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a. The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 Moveable directing unit 3500 after the back, and the movable back directing unit 3100 within the back box 3010 and moveable after the back A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box shape with a front opening and a square opening through the rear wall, and a frame-shaped liquid crystal attachment projecting in a flat plate shape with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. Part 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside on the right side in the back view of the liquid crystal attachment part 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1501 of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is inserted, and the back view of the liquid crystal attachment part 3010b A notch 3010d that is notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In addition, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100.

  The back box 3010 is not described in detail, but a boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Lower left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left sphere passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The lower left sphere passage unit 3030 is attached to a portion corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200 in the back box 3010. The lower left sphere passage unit 3030 is formed in an L shape in which the side of the front view shape extending vertically is shorter than the side extending left and right, and the inside is formed hollow. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is provided with three entrances 3031 that are open forward on the front surface and through which game balls can pass. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guide portions 2205 a in the side unit 2200.

  The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is inclined so that the hollow interior is lowered toward the right when viewed from the front. The A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030, and a game ball that has entered inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[5-9c. Lower right ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right sphere passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. This lower right sphere passage unit 3040 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is open toward the front, a first entrance 3041 through which a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable effect unit 3300 described later. A second advancement entrance 3042 that opens upward just below the discharge port 3303a that opens on the lower surface of the first entrance, and a center that is open upward to the right and in front of the second entrance 3042. And a third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2556 through the escape passage 2555 of the accessory 2500 can enter.

  The lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the game balls that have entered the first advance entrance 3041, the second advance entrance 3042, and the third advance entrance 3043 downward through independent passages. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first entrance 3041. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[5-9d. Back edge decoration unit]
Next, the back periphery decorative unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back periphery decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at portions corresponding to the upper side, the left side, and the lower left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The back periphery decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear periphery decoration member 3081 having translucency extending in a C-shape and the back periphery decoration member 3081, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A back periphery decorative substrate 3082 and a substrate cover 3083 that covers the back of the back periphery decorative substrate 3082 and is attached to the rear side of the back periphery decorative member 3081.

  The back periphery decoration unit 3080 can light-decorate the back periphery decoration member 3081 by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back periphery decoration substrate 3082 to emit light. Further, in the assembled state of the game board 5, the front surface of the back peripheral decoration member 3081 can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel board 1110, and the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

[5-9e. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back movable production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the backside movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the backside movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the backside movable effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the backside movable effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the backside decorative body unit of the backside movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106 is a disassembled view of the backside decorative body unit of the backside movable effect unit from the back. FIG. Further, FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back upper auxiliary decorative body in the back movable decorative body unit. FIG. 108 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the backside decorative body unit of the backside movable effect unit is in the retracted position, and FIG. 109 is the first backside decorative body unit of the backside movable effect unit. FIG. 110 is a front view showing a state of the internal mechanism at the appearance position, and FIG. 110 is a front view showing a state of the internal mechanism when the back decorative body unit of the back movable production unit is at the second appearance position.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back movable production unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is a perspective view of a part of the internal mechanism different from (a) as seen from the front. (C) is the perspective view which looked at (b) from the back. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing a partial movement of the internal mechanism of the back movable production unit. FIG. 113 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the main members constituting the internal mechanism in the retracted position, and FIG. 113 (b) shows the first transmission member rotating from the state of FIG. FIG. 114 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the transmission of rotation to the transmitted member is started, and FIG. 114 (c) is a back view of the first transmitted member further rotated together with the first transmitted member from the state of FIG. 113 (b). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the upper decoration body unit is falling toward the 1st appearance position from a retracted position, (d) is a 1st to-be-transmitted member further rotated with a 1st transmission member from the state of (c). And it is explanatory drawing which shows the state which transmission of the rotation to a 1st to-be-transmitted member was complete | finished, and the back decorative body unit reached | attained the 1st appearance position.

  Further, in FIG. 115 (e), the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114 (d) further rotates to transmit the rotation to the second transmitted member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state started, (f) is a state where the 2nd to-be-transmitted body unit rotates with a 2nd transmission member from the state of (e), and a back upper decoration body unit is a 2nd appearance position from a 1st appearance position. FIG. 116 (g) is an explanatory view showing a state where the second transmission member rotates together with the second transmission member from the state shown in FIG. 115 (f). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is rotating while the body unit further descend | falls toward a 2nd appearance position, (h) is a state where the 2nd transmitted member further rotates with the 2nd transmission member from the state of (g). The transmission of the rotation to the second receiving member is finished and the back decorative unit is in the first appearance position. While descending from the state is an explanatory view showing a state that has reached the second occurrence position by half turn.

  The back movable production unit 3100 is mounted in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a. The back movable production unit 3100 has a space formed between a unit base 3101 attached in the back box 3010 and extending to the left and right and a unit base 3101 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101. A rear cover 3102 and a back drive motor 3103 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the vicinity of the right end in a front view and having a rotating shaft penetrating the unit base 3101 and projecting between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102; It is equipped with.

  Further, the backside movable rendering unit 3100 includes a spur gear-like drive gear 3104 fixed to the rotating shaft of the backside drive motor 3103, and a spur gear-like first large-diameter gear 3105a meshing with the drive gear 3104. And a first small-diameter gear 3105b that is smaller in diameter than the first large-diameter gear 3105a and rotates integrally with the first large-diameter gear 3105a on the rear side of the first large-diameter gear 3105a. A first driven gear 3105 disposed on the opposite side, a spur gear-shaped second large diameter gear 3106a meshing with the first small diameter gear 3105b of the first driven gear 3105, and a smaller diameter than the second large diameter gear 3106a. The second large-diameter gear 3106a has a second small-diameter gear 3106b that rotates integrally with the second large-diameter gear 3106a, and is disposed on the left side of the first driven gear 3105 when viewed from the front. The second driven gear 3106 has a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a meshing with the second small-diameter gear 3106b of the second driven gear 3106, and is arranged on the left side of the second driven gear 3106 in front view. The first transmission member 3107 has a spur gear-like second transmission gear 3108a meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107, and is disposed on the left side of the first transmission member 3107 when viewed from the front. Second transmission member 3108 (see FIG. 111 (a) and the like).

  The first driven gear 3105, the second driven gear 3106, the first transmission member 3107, and the second transmission member 3108 are rotatable between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 by the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. Installed.

  The first transmission member 3107 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3107b projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge in front of the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a in parallel with the rotation axis, and revolution of the first transmission pin 3107b. Between the disk-shaped first lock protrusion 3107c that protrudes forward concentrically from the front surface of the first transmission gear 3107a with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock protrusion 3107c and the first transmission pin 3107b, From an equal range toward both sides of the axis line connecting the center of the first transmission gear 3107a and the center of the first transmission pin 3107b on the outer peripheral surface of the first lock protrusion 3107c toward the center of the first lock protrusion 3107c. And a first notch 3107d that is cut out in a fan shape.

  The second transmission member 3108 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3108b projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge in the front surface of the spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3108a, and a revolution of the second transmission pin 3108b. Between the disk-shaped second lock protrusion 3108c that protrudes forward concentrically from the front surface of the second transmission gear 3108a with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock protrusion 3108c and the second transmission pin 3108b, From an equal range toward both sides of the axis line connecting the center of the second transmission gear 3108a and the center of the second transmission pin 3108b on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3108c toward the center of the second lock projection 3108c. And a second cutout portion 3108d cut out in a fan shape.

  The first transmission gear 3107a and the second transmission gear 3108a of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. Further, the first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same cylindrical diameter and the same revolution radius. The first lock protrusion 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. Further, the first notch 3107d and the second notch 3108d of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are 72 degrees with respect to the circumferences of the first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c. It is formed in a fan shape in the angle range.

  Further, the back movable production unit 3100 has a columnar slide shaft 3109 attached to the unit base 3101 in the front surface near the left end of the unit base 3101 when viewed from the front and extending vertically, and an upper end of the slide shaft 3109. A shaft attachment member 3110 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101; a left slider 3111 having a plate-like detection piece 3111a attached to the slide shaft 3109 so as to be vertically slidable and extending backward; A back up / down detection sensor 3112 that detects the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 and is attached to the unit base 3101, and an upper part of the front of the unit base 3101 are attached to the left in front of the back drive motor 3103. , Lower end is unit base 310 A rail bracket 3113 extending vertically so as to protrude downward from the lower surface of the rail, a slide rail 3114 having a right slider 3114a attached to the left side surface of the rail bracket 3113 when viewed from the front, and sliding up and down, A rack member 3115 having a rack gear 3115a attached to the right slider 3114a of the rail 3114 and extending vertically, and a flat plate-like first movable member whose left and right ends are respectively attached to the left slider 3111 and the rack member 3115. A base 3116.

  Also, the back movable production unit 3100 includes a flat plate-like first substrate portion 3117a formed in a droplet shape, and a columnar first substrate projecting forward from a droplet-like tip in the first substrate portion 3117a. It has an action pin 3117b, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 so that the first action pin 3117b revolves at the right side of the front face of the first transmission member 3107 on the front surface of the unit base 3101. A first bearing member 3117 capable of transmitting the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 and a first bearing slit 3118a into which the first action pin 3117b of the first member 3117 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction. And a bearing member 3118 attached to the rear surface of the first movable base 3116.

  The first movable base 3116 has an opening 3116a that penetrates forward and backward and extends from the lower end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction. On the rear surface of the first movable base 3116, a rack member 3115 is attached to the right of the opening 3116a in front view. The rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 extends along the opening 3116a in a state where the tooth tip is directed leftward when viewed from the front.

  The first movable base 3116 is slidable up and down (movable up and down) by a slide shaft 3109 and a slide rail 3114 via a left slider 3111 and a right slider 3114a. The first movable base 3116 is regulated in the vertical direction by the first action pin 3117 b of the first transmitted member 3117 inserted in the first bearing slit 3118 a of the bearing member 3118. Accordingly, when the first acting member 3117 is rotated to revolve the first action pin 3117b and the vertical position of the first action pin 3117b is changed, the first action pin 3117b is moved in the first bearing slit 3118a. While sliding in the left-right direction, the first movable base 3116 slides in the up-down direction. That is, when the first transmitted member 3117 is rotated, the first movable base 3116 slides up and down.

  The first substrate portion 3117a of the first transmitted member 3117 has a base circle whose front view has a diameter substantially the same as the valley diameter of the gear teeth of the second large-diameter gear 3106a of the second driven gear 3106, and the base circle thereof. It is formed in a shape (so-called droplet shape) mainly composed of two sides extending so as to contact from the outside. The first transmitted member 3117 has the center of the base circle of the first base portion 3117 a as the center of rotation, and this center of rotation is arranged coaxially with the center of the second driven gear 3106. The first action pin 3117b protrudes from the vicinity of the two sides in contact with the base circle in the first substrate portion 3117a (a droplet-shaped tip).

  The first transmitted member 3117 has a cylindrical first received body portion 3117c having the same diameter as the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the first substrate portion 3117a, and the first received member 3117a. A first transmission slit 3117d that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3117c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3107b is slidably inserted, and a first transmission slit 3117d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3117c. And a pair of first lock recesses 3117e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The first lock recess 3117e is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107. The pair of first lock recesses 3117e are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back movable production unit 3100 is assembled, the first transmitted member 3117 includes the first transmitted body 3117c, the first transmission pin 3107b and the first lock projection 3107c of the first transmission member 3107, The position in the front-rear direction is the same. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3107b can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d, and the rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3170b and the first transmission slit 3117d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3107c can be inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3107c is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, thereby The rotation of the transmitted member 3117 can be restricted (locked).

  Further, the back movable production unit 3100 has a second bearing slit 3119a penetrating front and rear at the upper end portion and extending left and right, and a bearing hole 3119b penetrating front and rear at substantially the center in the vertical direction. The second movable base 3119 is slidably mounted on the rear surface of the first movable base 3116 so that the bearing hole 3119b faces the front from the opening 3116a, and is disposed in front of the first movable base 3116. A backside decorative body having a shaft portion 3151a rotatably inserted into the bearing hole 3119a of the second movable base 3119 and imitating the head including the face of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It is attached to the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a of the unit 3150 and the backside decorative body unit 3150 passing through the second movable base 3119. A spur gear-shaped decorative body rotating gear 3120 meshing with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115, and a flat gear mounted on the rear surface of the second movable base 3119 so as to cover the rear of the decorative body rotating gear 3120. A cover 3121.

  When the second movable base 3119 is slid relative to the first movable base 3116, the back decorative unit 3150 attached to the bearing hole 3119 b of the second movable base 3119 also moves together with the second movable base 3119. Slide to. At this time, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 attached to the shaft portion 3151a of the backside decorative body unit 3150 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116. When the two movable bases 3119 slide, the decorative body rotation gear 3120 rotates together with the back upper decorative body unit 3150.

  Further, the back movable production unit 3100 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 below the front second transmission member 3108 and in front of the unit base 3101 so that the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 can be transmitted. The second transmitted member 3122, the rotation link member 3123 attached to the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 so as to be slidable in the direction along the rotation surface, and the second transmitted member 3122 is slidably mounted in a direction intersecting the sliding direction with respect to 3122 and is rotatably mounted behind the first movable base 3116 and protrudes rearward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. A cylindrical second action pin 312 slidably inserted into the second bearing slit 3119a of the two movable bases 3119. Includes a second movable base driving member 3124 to have a, a shaft member 3125 are rotatably mounted relative to the second movable base driving member 3124 first movable base 3116, a.

  The second transmitted member 3122 includes a disk-shaped second substrate portion 3122a that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101, and a cylindrical second received body portion 3122b that protrudes rearward from the periphery of the second substrate portion 3122a. A second transmission slit 3122c that is recessed toward the center from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body portion 3122b and into which the second transmission pin 3108b is slidably inserted, and an outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body portion 3122b On both sides of the second transmission slit 3122c, a pair of second lock recesses 3122d recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center, and recessed backward from the front surface of the second substrate portion 3122a and with respect to the rotation axis A first transmission guide portion 3122e having a groove shape and one end portion opening on the outer peripheral surface of the second substrate portion 3122a. (See, etc. FIG. 111 (b) and (c)).

  The second transmitted member 3122 has a radius of the second substrate portion 3122a (second transmitted main body portion 3122b) shorter than the distance from the rotation center to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and the second lock protrusion. It is formed longer than the distance to the outer peripheral surface of 3108c. The second lock recess 3122d is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108. Further, the pair of second lock recesses 3122d are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The first guide transmission portion 3122e extends at an angle of 54 degrees with respect to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c extends. In addition, the first guide transmission portion 3122e opens on the circumferential surface in the direction opposite to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c opens on the circumferential surface.

  The rotating link member 3123 protrudes from the rear surface of the flat link body 3123a and the link main body 3123a, and is inserted into the first transmission guide 3122e of the second transmitted member 3122 so as to be slidable. A pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b, a front projecting portion 3123c projecting from the front surface of the link main body portion 3123a, and recessed from the front surface of the front projecting portion 3123c to the rear, the first transmitted guide portion 3123b extends. A groove-shaped second transmission guide portion 3123d extending in a direction intersecting with the direction in which the both ends are open on the outer peripheral surface of the front protrusion 3123c (FIGS. 111 (b) and ( c) etc.).

  The pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b of the rotary link member 3123 are provided symmetrically with respect to an axis passing through the center of the link main body 3123a and are provided eccentric from the center. The second transmission guide portion 3123c is provided on an axis passing through the center of the link main body portion 3123a. The first transmitted guide portion 3123b and the second transmitted guide portion 3123c each extend in a direction that intersects at an angle of 95 degrees.

  The second movable base drive member 3124 protrudes rearward from a position where the second action pin 3124a is eccentric with respect to the rotation center, and a drive main body 3124b that is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116; The second transmitted guide portion that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the portion 3124b, passes through the center of rotation and extends at a right angle to the rotational axis, and is slidably inserted into the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotary link member 3123. 3124c (see FIGS. 111B and 111C).

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 includes a decorative body base 3151 having a flat plate shape and a shaft portion 3151a protruding in a cylindrical shape from the center of the rear surface, and a decorative body base 3151. Is attached to the front of the decorative body base 3151 and a back decorative body 3152 having two elliptical openings 3152a, three-dimensionally imitating the head of a predetermined character. And a C-shaped backside decorative body substrate 3153 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The back upper decorative body unit 3150 is disposed behind the back upper decorative body 3152 in the approximate center of the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 and extends in the left and right directions, and both ends of the guide shaft 3154. Is attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 so that it can be guided to the left and right by a guide shaft 3154, and has a guide slit 3156a extending vertically at the lower center in the left-right direction. A flat accessory slider 3156 and a pair of openings 3152a attached to the front surface of the accessory decorative slider 3156 and closing the pair of openings 3152a on the back upper ornament body 3152, and an oval shape facing the opening 3152a The sub-upper decorative body 3157 provided with the sub-decoration 3157a and the rear side of the sub-upper decorative body 3157 Includes a backing on a secondary decorative substrate 3158 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the front surface of the decorative body slider 3156 is mounted, the.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the rear upper sub drive motor 3159 attached to the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 so that the rotation shaft extends left and right, and to the rotation shaft of the back upper sub drive motor 3159. Worm gear 3160, disk-shaped main body 3161a that is rotatably attached to decorative body base 3151 above worm gear 3156, and extends along the outer peripheral surface of main body 3161a, and meshes with worm gear 3160. Is projecting forward from the distal end of the extended piece 3161c and the extended piece 3161c extending from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161a opposite to the gear portion 3161b to the rear of the auxiliary decorative body slider 3156. It is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3156a of the sub decorative body slider 3156. Columnar slide pin 3161D, a gear member 3161 that has a, and a.

  In the backside decorative body unit 3150, the two openings 3152a of the backside decorative body 3152 form the outer periphery of the eyes of a predetermined character, and the backside decorative body 3157 is the sub-side of the backside top decorative body 3157 facing forward from the two openings 3152a. The decoration 3157a forms a pupil. The back upper decoration body 3152 and the back upper sub decoration body 3157 have translucency, and are decorated with light emission by the LEDs of the back upper decoration board 3153 and the back upper sub decoration board 3158 arranged at the rear of each. .

  As shown in the figure, the backside decorative body unit 3150 is in a state where the head of a predetermined character deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 is upside down. Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 can slide the back upper sub decorative body 3157 to the left and right with respect to the back upper decorative body 3152 by the rotational drive of the back upper sub drive motor 3159. Accordingly, a movable effect can be performed in which the pupil (sub-decoration 3157a) of the predetermined character being deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 crawls left and right.

  Next, the operation of the back movable production unit 3100 will be described in detail. First, the operation of the back upper decorative body 3157 in the back upper decorative body unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in a normal state, the extension piece 3161c of the gear member 3161 is attached in a state of extending vertically upward. In this state, the sub-decorative body slider 3156 is positioned substantially at the center of the slide range extending in the left-right direction, and the two sub-decorations of the back-side sub-decoration body 3157 attached to the front surface of the sub-decorative body slider 3156 are provided. The decoration 3157a is located at approximately the center in the two openings 3152a of the back upper decoration body 3152, respectively. That is, in a normal state, a predetermined character that is deceived by the back upper decorative body 3152 looks at the front.

  In this normal state, for example, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side by the back upper side drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161 is engaged with the worm gear 3160 by the gear portion 3161b. It rotates in the clockwise direction and revolves so that the sliding pin 3161d located above the center of rotation moves to the left. By the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the left, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the left, so that the auxiliary decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the left. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a moves to the left, so that the predetermined character being deceived by the back upper decoration 3152 is looking left (see FIG. 107 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the right side by the back side auxiliary drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3161b engaged with the worm gear 3160. Then, the sliding pin 3161d located above the rotation center revolves so as to move to the right. By the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the right, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the right, and the auxiliary decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the right. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a moves to the right, so that the predetermined character being deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 is looking right (see FIG. 107 (c)).

  In this way, the sub decoration 3157a can be moved to the left and right by the rotational drive of the back upper sub drive motor 3159. Therefore, depending on the gaming state, the predetermined character being deceived by the back upper decoration body 3152 can be seen. It is possible to perform a movable effect that changes the direction in which the user is. In addition, by moving the sub-decoration 3157a back and forth to the left and right, it is possible to perform a movable effect that makes the eyes of the predetermined character obscured by the backside decorative body 3152 scrambled, and presents a variety of movable effects to the player. can do.

  Then, the raising / lowering operation | movement of the back top decoration body unit 3150 in the back top movable production | presentation unit 3100 is demonstrated in detail. The back movable production unit 3100 of the present embodiment can raise and lower the back decorative body unit 3150 and can rotate the back decorative body unit 3150 by 180 degrees.

  First, the internal mechanism of the back movable effect unit 3100 for raising and lowering the back decorative body unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108, FIG. 111, and the like, a back drive motor 3103 having a rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction is disposed at the right end in front view. The rotation center of the first driven gear 3105 that meshes with the drive gear 3104 attached to the rotation shaft of the backside drive motor 3103 is arranged in the lower left of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the drive gear 3104. The rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 that meshes with the first driven gear 3105 is arranged at substantially the same height as the rotation center of the drive gear 3104 in the upper left of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the first driven gear 3105. Yes. Further, the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 having the first transmission gear 3107a meshing with the second driven gear 3106 is lower left in front view with respect to the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106, and the rotation of the first driven gear 3105. It is arranged at almost the same height as the center. Furthermore, the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 having the second transmission gear 3108a meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107 is the upper left in the front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107. The second driven gear 3106 is disposed at a position higher than the rotation center.

  The rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 to which the rotation from the first transmission member 3106 is transmitted is coaxial with the second driven gear 3106 at the upper right in front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3106. Placed in position. On the other hand, the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is slightly to the left of the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 from directly under the front view. It is arranged at a position lower than the center of rotation. The rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 to which the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is transmitted is arranged on an axis extending vertically up and down passing through the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122.

  In the normal state, the backside decorative body unit 3150 is positioned at the rising end in the up and down range, and the top and bottom of a predetermined character that is deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 is reversed. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is mostly located behind the center accessory 2500, and only a small part is a frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be seen from the player side through the inside. That is, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is located at a retracted position that is hardly visible from the player side in a normal state.

  When the back decorative unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the first transmission pin 3107b of the first transmission member 3107 is in front of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 as shown in FIG. 108 and FIG. The second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 is located at the upper left of the second transmission member 3108 with respect to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108. It is located at a position inclined about 13 degrees to the right from the vertical line. Further, at this retracted position, the first action pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is a position inclining about 45 degrees to the upper left as viewed from the front with respect to the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 (leftward from the vertical line). ) And the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 is smaller than the axis line connecting the first action pin 3117b from the center of rotation (about 72 with respect to the vertical line). The angle extends to the upper left of the front view.

  In the retracted position, the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 extends from the center of rotation toward the upper left of the front view (an angle of about 36 degrees from the vertical line to the left). The second movable base drive member 3124 has a rotation center located above the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 and slightly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and has a second action. The pin 3124a is located at the upper right of the second movable base drive member 3124 in the front view (position inclined about 45 degrees to the right from the vertical line).

Further, when in the retracted position, the first lock projection 3107c of the first transmission member 3107 is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e of one of the first transmitted members 3117 (the one closer to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107). ing. Thereby, since the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is restricted (locked), the first movable base 3116 does not slide up and down. The second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is inserted into the second lock recess 3122d of one of the second transmitted members 3122 (the one closer to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108).
Accordingly, since the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is restricted (locked), the second movable base drive member 3124 does not rotate, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide up and down.

  Further, when the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 on which the first movable base 3116 is slidably attached up and down is detected by the back upper and lower detection sensor 3112.

  When the back top decorative body unit 3150 is in the retracted position and the back top drive motor 3103 rotates the drive gear 3104 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back top movable production unit 3100 has the first driven gear 3105 and the first driven gear 3105. The first transmission member 3107 rotates in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 rotates in the counterclockwise direction through the two driven gears 3106 at the same speed. First, the first transmission pin 3107d of the first transmission member 3107 starts entering the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 (see FIG. 113 (b)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated clockwise, the first notch 3107d is rotated to the position of the first lock recess 3117e. The first lock protrusion 3107c is removed from the first lock recess 3117e, and the first transmission pin 3107b comes into contact with the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3117d to press the first transmission slit 3117d downward. Accordingly, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, and the first transmitted member 3117 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. At this time, the first notch 3107d is located at the first lock recess 3117e, and the first lock protrusion 3107c is removed from the first lock recess 3117e (unlocked). Therefore, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates without being blocked by the first lock protrusion 3107c (see FIG. 114 (c)).

  By rotating the first transmitted member 3117 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the first action pin 3117b revolves downward and the first action pin 3117b is slidably inserted. The first movable base 3116 slides downward through the single bearing slit 3118a. Since the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body unit 3105 also slides downward together with the first movable base 3116.

  When the first movable base 3116 slides downward, the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotary link member 3123 extends vertically, so that it is attached to the first movable base 3116 and the second transmission guide portion 3123d. The second movable base driving member 3214 having the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the second movable base 3116 can move downward together with the first movable base 3116, and the first movable base 3116 slides smoothly.

When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated clockwise, the first transmission pin 3107b is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3117d, and the first The lock protrusion 3107c enters the other first lock recess 3117e different from the first lock recess 3117e into which the first lock protrusion 3107c was originally inserted. Thereby, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is stopped, and the downward sliding of the first movable base 3116 is stopped (see FIG. 109 and FIG. 114 (d)).
This state is a state in which the first movable base 3116 is positioned at the lower end of the lifting range, and the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is positioned in the first appearance position. In the first transmission member 3107, the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3107b is inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 is the first specific rotation range.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the top and bottom decorative bodies 3152 are approximately half in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. , Facing the player from within the frame of the center bonus 2500. In the state of the first appearance position, the pair of openings 3152a of the backside decorative body 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a can be partially viewed from the player side. Thereby, it is possible to present a movable effect such that a predetermined character that is deceived by the back upper decorative body 3152 is looking upside down from above.

  When the back decorative unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 rotating together with the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the second transmission member 3122 by the second transmission. It has not reached the slit 3122c. Further, the rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 attached to the first movable base 3116 is positioned below the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 and the second rotation link member 3123 has a second rotation center. Only the upper part of the second transmitted guide part 3124c of the second movable base drive member 3124 is guided with respect to the transmission guide part 3123d.

  From the state in which the back decorative unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise, the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated clockwise, and the second transmission member 3108 is rotated. Is further rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the first transmission pin 3107b moves away from the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission pin 3108b enters the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122. Is started (see FIG. 115 (e)).

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated counterclockwise and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated counterclockwise, the second notch 3108d is rotated to the position of the second lock recess 3122d. The second lock projection 3108c is disengaged from the second lock recess 3122d, and the second transmission pin 3108b comes into contact with the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3122c to press the second transmission slit 3122c to the right in front view. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122, and the second transmitted member 3122 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. At this time, the second notch 3108d is located at the site of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second lock protrusion 3108c is released from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d (the lock is released). Therefore, the second transmitted member 3122 rotates without being blocked by the second lock protrusion 3108c (see FIG. 115 (f)).

  When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first transmission guide portion 3122e formed on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 also rotates, so that the first transmission guide portion 3122e The rotary link member 3123 having the first transmitted guide portion 3123b guided so as to be slidable also tends to rotate in the same clockwise direction. On the other hand, the upper part of the second transmission guide portion 3124c of the second movable base drive member 3124 that is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 slides on the second transmission guide portion 3123d on the front surface of the rotary link member 3123. Guided as possible. As a result, when the rotation link member 3123 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the first transmitted member 3122, the second transmission guide unit 3123d and the second transmitted guide are also rotated in an attempt to rotate the second transmission guide unit 3123d. An attempt is made to revolve the second movable base drive member 3124 around the rotary link member 3123 via the portion 3124c.

  However, since the second movable base drive member 3124 is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve around the rotary link member 3123, the force acting on the second transmitted guide portion 3124c. On the contrary, the rotary link member 3123 tries to revolve around the second movable base drive member 3124 by the reaction force. At this time, the rotation link member 3123 intersects the direction in which the first transmission guide portion 3122e extends (first direction) and the direction in which the second transmission guide portion 3123d extends (first direction). Second link extending in the direction), so that the rotary link member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction so that the force acting on the rotary link member 3123 is reduced. It becomes. Thereby, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3122 is transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 by the rotation of the rotary link member 3123 and the sliding in the first direction and the second direction, and the second movable base drive member. 3124 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 115 (f) to 116 (h)).

  In other words, the rotary link member 3123 is forcibly rotated by the second transmitted member 3122 by the first transmission guide portion 3122e and the first transmitted guide portion 3123b. When the rotary link member 3123 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second transmission guide portion 3123d extending vertically in FIG. 115 (e) is inclined obliquely so that its upper end moves to the right. (See FIG. 115 (f)). When the second transmission guide portion 3123d rotates and tilts, the second movable base drive member 3124 attempts to revolve via the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the second transmission guide portion 3123d. Since the base drive member 3124 is attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve, the rotary link member 3123 transmits the first transmission by the reaction force of the force acting on the second movable base drive member 3124 from the rotary link member 3123. Along the guide part 3122e, it slides greatly to the open side (right side in front view), and slightly slides to the rotation center side (downward) of the second movable base drive member 3124 along the second transmission guide part 3123d. Then, the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates at the same angle as the angle at which the second transmission guide portion 3123d is inclined.

  When the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second action pin 3124a revolves so as to move downward, so that the second action pin 3124a is slidably inserted. The second movable base 3119 slides downward via the second bearing slit 3119a. Since the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body unit 3105 slides further downward from the first appearance position together with the second movable base 3119. At this time, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is rotatably mounted by the shaft portion 3151a and the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119, and the decorative body rotation mounted on the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a. Since the gear 3120 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116, when the second movable base 3119 slides downward, the back upper decorative body together with the decorative body rotating gear 3120. The unit 3150 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 115 (f) and the like).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmitted member 3122 is further rotated in the clockwise direction via the second transmission member 3108, the rotary link member 3123 is connected to the second transmitted member 3122. Rotate in the clockwise direction at the same angle, slide further toward the open side along the first transmission guide portion 3122e, and move the center of the rotary link member 3123 along the second transmission guide portion 3123d to the second movable position. The second movable base drive member 3124 is further rotated in the clockwise direction by sliding so as to approach the rotation center of the base drive member 3124. As a result, the backside decorative body unit 3150 slides further downward together with the second movable base 3119, and the backside decorative body unit 3150 further rotates counterclockwise (see FIG. 116 (g)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3108b is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3122c and the second lock. The protrusion 3108c enters into another second lock recess 3122d different from the second lock recess 3122d in which the second lock protrusion 3108c was originally inserted. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is stopped, the downward sliding of the second movable base 3199 is stopped, and the top and bottom decorative body unit 3150 is 180 degrees above the first appearance position. It stops in the rotated state (see FIG. 110 and FIG. 116 (h)). This state is a state where the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are positioned at the lower end of the lifting range, and the back decorative body unit 3150 is positioned at the second appearance position. . In the second transmission member 3108, the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3108b is inserted into the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 is the second specific rotation range.

  In the state in which the back decorative body unit 3150 (back decorative body 3152) is in the second appearance position, the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is in the second lock recess 3122d of the second transmitted member 3122. Since it is inserted, the second transmitted member 3122 is prevented from rotating, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide downward any further. In the state where the backside decorative body unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 148, the top and bottom of a predetermined character being deceived by the backside decorative body 3152 is in a normal state, and the backside decorative body unit 3150 is in the normal state. The upper decorative body 3152 is positioned substantially at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500 so that the substantially entire back upper decorative body 3152 can be viewed from the player side.

  When the backside decorative body unit 3150 is lowered from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the backside movable effect unit 3100 descends while rotating 180 degrees while the backside decorative body 3152 having been reversed in the upside down position is lowered. Then, the player can be presented with a movable effect located substantially in the center of the center object 2500 (front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) with the top and bottom in a normal state, which greatly surprises the player. Can do.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the second appearance position and the drive gear 3104 is rotated in the range direction (clockwise in front view) by the back upper drive motor 3103, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is rotated. Moves up to the retracted position through the first appearance position while performing the reverse operation, and when the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 is detected by the back up / down detection sensor 3112, the drive gear by the back drive motor 3103 The rotation of 3104 stops and the back decorative unit 3150 returns to the retracted position.

  The back movable movable unit 3100 can lift and lower the back decorative unit 3150 from the retracted position to the first appearance position and from the first appearance position to the second appearance position in two stages. Apart from that, the back upper decorative body 3157 (sub decoration 3157a) can be slid to the left and right relative to the back upper decorative body 3152 (perpendicular to the vertical direction of the back upper decorative body 3152). By appropriately combining, various movable effects can be presented.

[5-9f. Front-bottom front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit before the back bottom movable effect unit of the back unit, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the back unit before the back direction movable effect unit. FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the front lower back first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body from the front in the normal retracted position of the front back front movable effect unit, and FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the front lower front first decorative body and the rear lower front second decorative body from the front in the state of appearance.

  The back lower front movable effect unit 3200 is disposed below the opening 3101a near the front end in the back box 3010. This back-under-front movable effect unit 3200 is attached to a flat unit base 3201 attached to the front surface of the back-under-behind movable effect unit 3500 and the upper left corner of the unit base 3201 in the front view when viewed from the front. The front lower back drive motor 3202 that protrudes forward through 3201, the drive gear 3203 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back front drive motor 3202, and the drive gear 3203 are meshed from the lower right when viewed from the front. A transmission gear 3204 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and a pinion gear 3205 that meshes with the transmission gear 3204 from the lower right as viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3201.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 has a rack gear 3206a that meshes with the pinion gear 3205 from the right in the front view and extends vertically, and a flat detection piece 3206b that protrudes to the right in the front view. The rack member 3206 is slidably attached to the unit base 3201 so as to be slidable up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3201. The drive gear 3203, the transmission gear 3204, the pinion gear 3205, and the rack member 3206 are A unit cover 3207 that covers from the front, and a front-back movable detection sensor 3208 that is attached to the unit cover 3207 and can detect the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 are provided.

  Furthermore, the front back movable movable effect unit 3200 has a link pin 3209a protruding in a columnar shape from the position between the center in the left-right direction in the front view and the left end, and the left end in the front view is the upper end of the rack member 3206. The front back front first decorative body 3209 having a three-dimensional decoration is attached to the unit base 3201 so that the right end of the front view is slidable up and down. A back-bottom front first decorative board 3210 attached to the rear surface of one decorative body 3209 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a strip-like base end portion of the back bottom front first decorative body 3209, and a unit base The unit base 3201 is attached to the unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3207 so as to be rotatable in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction between the unit base 3201 and the link pin 32. A link member 3211 having a link slit 3211a extending in an arc shape into which 9a is slidably inserted, and a front under back imitating the hand of a predetermined character attached to the tip of the link member 3211 It has a second decorative body 3212 and a back-under-front second decorative board 3213 attached to the rear surface of the back-under-front front second decorative body 3212 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Next, the operation of the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the back-under-front movable production unit 3200 is lowered with respect to the rack member 3206 to which the back-under-front front first decorative body 3209 is attached in the normal state, and the vertical sliding direction. The link member 3211 which is located at the end and to which the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is attached extends obliquely so that the tip is located slightly upward with respect to the horizontal.

  In this state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and cannot be viewed from the player side (see FIG. 83). That is, in the normal state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in a retracted position that cannot be visually recognized by the player. In the state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the retracted position, the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the back lower front movable detection sensor 3208.

  In the normal state, when the drive gear 3203 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the pinion gear 3205 rotates counterclockwise in the normal state. The rack member 3206 is raised by the rack gear 3206a meshing with the pinion gear 3205. Since the back lower front first decorative body 3209 is attached to the upper end of the rack member 3206, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 also rises together with the rack member 3206.

  When the lower back front decorative body 3209 is lifted, the link pin 3209a inserted into the link slit 3211a of the link member 3211 is also lifted. The link member 3211 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the base end. And since the back bottom front 2nd decoration body 3212 is attached to the front-end | tip of the link member 3211, the back bottom front 2nd decoration body 3212 moves upward with the raise of the back back front 1st decoration body 3209. As shown in FIG. Rotate to move.

  Thereafter, when the rack member 3206 reaches the ascending end, the rotation of the front lower back drive motor 3202 stops, the front lower front first decorative body 3209 stops rising, and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates. Stops. In this state, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the link member 3211 is in an upright state, and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 is positioned above the lower back front first decorative body 3209. .

  In the state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are raised, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are as shown in FIG. It is located in the front view frame of the center accessory 2500 and can be sufficiently visually recognized from the player side (front). That is, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in an appearance position that can be visually recognized from the player side. As shown in FIG. 148, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are positioned in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back movable movable effect unit 3100 in the appearance position. The back upper decorative body 3152 does not come into contact. Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is formed so as to partially overlap the back upper decorative body 3152 at the second appearance position by being moved to the appearance position.

  In addition, with the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 in the appearance position, the back lower front drive motor 3102 causes the drive gear 3103 to move in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front). ), The back lower front first decorative body 3209 descends and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates so as to move to the left in the front view. When the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the lower back front movable detection sensor 3208, the rotational driving of the lower back front drive motor 3102 stops, and the lowering of the lower back front first decorative body 3209 stops. The rotation of the second lower front decorative body 3212 stops, and the first lower front decorative body 3209 and the second lower front decorative body 3212 return to the retracted position.

  In this way, the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 allows the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 to be outside the frame (retracted position) and within the frame (appearance position) of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the player can be surprised by appearing in the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 is raised so that the back lower front second decorative body 3212 appears to rotate, and the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body. Since 3212 appears in a different motion, the illusion that the motion of the movable performance is a complex motion can be provided, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9g. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119A is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119B is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 120 (a) is a front view of the back-right movable effect unit with the first decorative surface of the back-right rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) is the back-right rotating decorative body in (a). It is a front view of the back right movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which opened this shutter, (c) is a front view of the back right movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which orient | assigned the 2nd decoration surface of the back right rotation decoration body to the front. (D) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit showing the third decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front.

  The back right movable effect unit 3300 is attached in the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a in front view. This back-right movable effect unit 3300 includes a back-right sheet metal base 3301 that is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends vertically in a front view, and a back-right upper base that is mounted on the upper front of the back-right sheet metal base 3301. 3302, a back right lower base 3303 attached to the lower front surface of the back right sheet metal base 3301, a back right drive motor 3304 attached to the lower surface of the back right lower base 3303, and rotationally driven by the back right drive motor 3304 And a columnar back right rotating decorative body 3310 that is rotatably attached by a back upper right base 3302 and a back right lower base 3303.

  The back right sheet metal base 3301 is formed of a metal plate. The back upper right base 3302 includes a cylindrical cover portion 3302a having a low height that covers the upper portion of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, and a cutout portion 3302b in which a predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the cover portion 3302a is cut out. . The lower right base 3303 has a discharge port 3303a penetrating vertically. The notch 3302b of the back upper right base 3302 is located immediately after the rear discharge port 2554 in the center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Further, the discharge port 3303 a of the back lower right base 3303 is located immediately above the second advancement entrance 3042 of the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

  The back right rotating decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3310a, a second decorative surface 3310b, and a third decorative surface 3310c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. The back-right rotating decorative body 3310 has an opening 3311 extending upward and downward on the first decorative surface 3310a and a pair of openings 3311 that are closed from the center of rotation and are slidably attached to each other. The shutter 3312, the inner decorative body 3313 attached to the center in the vertical direction of the opening 3311 on the rotational center side of the pair of shutters 3312, and the inner decorative body 3313 attached to the rotational center side and facing outward. The back right first decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is attached to the rotation center side of the back right first decorative board, and the pair of shutters 3312 approach or separate from each other. And a back right shutter solenoid (not shown).

  On the first decorative surface 3310a of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310, usually, a pair of shutters 3312 are in close contact with each other (see FIG. 120 (a)). Then, when the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by driving the back right shutter solenoid according to the gaming state, the inner decorative body 3313 faces the outside from between the pair of shutters 3312. In this state, the back right first decoration The player can show the player the inner decorative body 3313 that has been decorated with light emission by causing the LED on the board to emit light.

  The second decorative surface 3310b of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a back-right character decoration 3318 having a translucent shape in which a predetermined character is formed in a relief shape, although detailed illustration is omitted. Have. A back-right second decorative board (not shown) in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing outward is attached to the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3310b. The second decorative surface 3310b (back right character decoration 3318) can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative substrate.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the third decoration surface 3310 c of the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 is opened so that a game ball can enter a portion having the same height as the cover portion 3302 a of the back-upper base 3302. The back right sphere entrance 3320 and the back right sphere entrance 3320 are communicated with the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 and are arranged closer to the center of rotation than the outer peripheral surface. , A ball guiding member 3322 that is installed in the back right effect space 3321 and spirally moves the game ball that has entered the back right ball entrance 3320 downward, A back right third decorative substrate 3323 extending vertically adjacent to the right effect space 3321 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

Next, the operation of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 will be described. The back-right movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 in any direction around the axis extending in the vertical direction by the rotational drive of the back-right drive motor 3304. In the normal state (first decoration state), the back right movable effect unit 3300 has the first decoration surface 3310a facing forward, as shown in FIG. 120 (a).
On the first decorative surface 3310a, a pair of shutters 3312 disposed closer to the center of rotation than the opening 3311 is normally in contact with each other to close the opening 3311.

  Further, in the first decorative state, the notch 3302b of the cover portion 3302a in the back upper right base 3302 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. Therefore, when the back right movable effect unit 3300 is in the first decorative state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center accessory 2500 that coincides with the notch 3302b is also closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. As a result, when a game ball is received in the top prize winning port 2006 of the center accessory 2500 in the first decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guide path 2553 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310a. Therefore, the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear guiding path 2553, passes through the escape passage 2555, and passes from the discharge port 2556 to the back right ball passage. It is delivered to the third entrance 3043 of the unit 3040 and discharged downward through the back right sphere passage unit 3040.

  When this back right movable effect unit 3300 is energized to a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in the first decoration state, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated in the vertical direction, and the inner decoration body 3313 is moved between the pair of shutters 3312. It will be in the state which faces outside (refer FIG.120 (b)). Then, an LED (high-intensity LED) of a back right first decorative board (not shown) arranged closer to the rotation center than the inner decorative body 3313 is caused to emit light, and the inner decorative body 3313 facing between the pair of shutters 3312 is emitted. Decorate. Thereby, the arrival of an opportunity etc. can be suggested to a player.

  Further, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decoration surface 3310b of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back right drive motor 3304. (See FIG. 120 (c)). In this second decoration state, the back right character decoration 3318 made up of a predetermined character formed on the second decoration surface 3310b can be illuminated and illuminated by causing the LED of the back right second decoration board (not shown) to emit light. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. In the second decorative state, the notch 3302b of the cover portion 3302a is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decorative surface 3310b, as in the first decorative state.

  Further, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decoration surface 3310c of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back right drive motor 3304. (See FIG. 120 (d)). In the third decoration state, as shown in the drawing, the back right effect space 3321 in which the game ball can be distributed can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, in the third decoration state, the back right sphere entrance 3320 is located at a portion of the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a. Therefore, in the third decoration state, the rear outlet 2554 of the center accessory 2500 and the back right sphere inlet 3320 are aligned, and the game balls are in communication with each other.

  Then, in the third decoration state, the game ball received in the top prize winning port 2006 of the center accessory 2500 enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the back discharge port 2554 of the back guide path 2553, and the back right effect space 3321. The ball guiding member 3322 arranged in the position flows down while rotating around the axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 a plurality of times (here, 8 times) (see FIG. 175 (a)). . As a result, the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 can be spiraled down in the back right effect space 3321, so that the player can surely see the game ball accepted in the upper prize winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for paying out the game ball by accepting the game ball at the upper prize opening 2006 and to entertain the player with the game ball flowing down in a spiral shape. Can be suppressed. Also, the game balls received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 are caused to flow down while spirally rotating, so that a larger number than the number actually entered the upper prize winning opening 2006 has entered. There is also an effect that the player can have an illusion.

  Thereafter, the game ball flowing down in the back right effect space 3321 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 and enters the second entrance 3042 of the right lower ball guide unit 3040 that is opened directly below. Then, it passes through the lower right ball passage unit 3040 and is discharged into the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Thus, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9h. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. 121A is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121B is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit with the first decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing forward, and (b) is the second decoration of the back left rotating decorative body. It is a front view of the back left movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which faced the front, (c) is a front view of the back left movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which orient | assigned the 3rd decoration surface of the back left rotation decoration body to the front. (D) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state where the back left protruding decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is set as the appearance position in the state of (a). FIG. 123 is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 122 (a).

  The back left movable effect unit 3400 is attached in the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in front view. This back left movable production unit 3400 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a back left sheet metal base 3401 extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a back left upper base attached to the front upper part of the back left sheet metal base 3401. 3402, a back left lower base 3403 attached to the lower front portion of the back left sheet metal base 3401, a back left drive motor 3404 attached to the bottom surface of the back left bottom base 3403, and a back left drive motor 3404. And a columnar back left rotating decorative body 3410 that is rotatably attached to the back left upper base 3402 and the back left lower base 3403. The back left sheet metal base 3401 is formed of a metal plate.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3410a, a second decorative surface 3410b, and a third decorative surface 3410c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a door decoration 3411 with a door on the first decorative surface 3410a. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 is disposed closer to the center of rotation than the first decorative surface, and has a back left first decorative substrate 3412 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing outward. . The first decorative surface 3410a can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the LED on the back left first decorative substrate 3412.

  Further, on the second decorative surface 3410b of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, although not shown in detail, characters different from the back right character decoration 3318 of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 are formed in a relief shape. A back left character decoration 3413 having translucency is provided. A back left second decorative board 3414 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing the outside is attached to the rotation center side of the second decorative face 3410b. The second decorative surface 3410b (back left character decoration 3413) can be illuminated.

  Further, on the third decorative surface 3410c of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, a back left projecting portion 3415 forming an outer peripheral surface, and a rotation center side with respect to the back left projecting portion 3415 are disposed, so that translucency is achieved. And a back left third decorative board 3417 on which a plurality of color LEDs are mounted on a surface that is disposed closer to the rotation center than the projection film 3416 and faces outward. Although not shown, the projection film 3416 has a red design projected in red and a blue design projected in blue, which are represented by a single color and are different from each other. A portion where the design and the blue design overlap is milky white or transparent, and a portion other than the red design and the blue design is black or opaque. In the third decorative portion 3410c, when the red light is emitted on the back left third decorative substrate 3417, the red design can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415, and when the blue light is emitted, the blue design is backed. The image can be projected on the left projection unit 3415.

  In addition, the third decorative surface 3410c has a pair of door members 3420 that are vertically arranged at the end portion of the back left projection portion 3415 near the first decorative surface 3410a and that can be opened and closed, and more than each door member 3420. A pair of rear left protrusions that are arranged on the rotation center side and are slidably attached between a retracted position inside the outer peripheral surface of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and an appearance position protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface. A decorative body 3421 and a pair of back-left decorative body solenoids 3422 that are attached in the back-left rotating decorative body 3410 and slide-drive each back-left protruding decorative body 3421 are provided.

  As illustrated, the door member 3420 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. Although not shown, the door member 3420 is rotatably attached at both ends of the side extending up and down on the side far from the first decorative surface 3410a, and the side side extending up and down on the opposite side is third. It opens and closes to move outward from the decorative surface 3410c. Moreover, the door member 3420 has a hook-like closing claw 3420a that protrudes from the inner side surface in the vicinity of the vertically extending side that is rotatably attached.

  The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is attached so that the sliding direction is the left-right direction when the first decorative surface 3410a is directed forward (front). The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is formed in a shape that looks like a shuriken as shown in FIG. The back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes in the direction away from the first decorative surface 3410a from the vicinity of the tip, and has a closing piece 3421a that can be engaged with the closing claw 3420a of the door member 3420.

  Next, the operation of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 will be described. This back left movable effect unit 3400 can rotate the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in any direction around the axis extending in the vertical direction by the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3404. In the normal state (first decoration state), the back left movable effect unit 3400 is stopped with the first decoration surface 3410a facing forward, as shown in FIG. 122 (a). In this first decorative state, the first decorative surface 3410a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the back left first decorative substrate 3412 to emit light. Since the first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 simulating a door, the first decorative surface 3410a is illuminated to make the player think that the door decoration 3411 opens. Can increase the player's expectation.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is accommodated inside the back left rotating decorative body 3410 by a biasing force of a spring (not shown) in a normal state. Located in the retracted position. In the retracted position, the outer surface of the door member 3420 is in a closed state in which the outer surface of the door member 3420 is flush with the third decorative surface 3410c, and the closing piece 3421a of the back left protruding decorative body 3421 is the closing claw of the door member 3420. 3420a. As a result, even if the centrifugal force acts on the back left protruding decorative body 3421 and the door member 3420 by rotating the back left rotating decorative body 3410, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 is moved to the appearance position by the biasing force of a spring (not shown). The sliding member 3420a can be blocked by the locking claw 3420a and the door member 3420 can be prevented from opening.

  When the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 is driven (energized) in the first decorative state, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 slides outward against the urging force of a spring (not shown) and the back left protruding. The door member 3420 is opened by being pushed by the tip of the decorative body 3421, and the back left protruding decorative body 3421 is in an appearance position where it protrudes outward from the third decorative surface 3410c. Thereby, the back left protrusion decoration body 3421 protrudes from the back left rotation decoration body 3410 which rotates in a cylindrical shape, and thus the player can be surprised. Further, since the pair of back left protruding decorative bodies 3421 can be independently protruded, various movable effects can be presented to the player.

  When the drive of the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 is stopped in the appearance position, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 slides to the retracted position by a spring (not shown). At this time, the closing piece 3421a is locked to the locking claw 3420a, and the door member 3420 can be rotated from the open state to the closed state, and automatically returns to the normal state.

  Further, the back left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decoration surface 3410b of the back left rotation decoration body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back left drive motor 3404. Yes (see FIG. 122 (b)). In this second decoration state, the back left character decoration 3413 can be illuminated by appropriately emitting the LED on the back left second decoration board 3414, which suggests that the player has an opportunity, etc. Can do.

  Further, the back left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decoration surface 3410c of the back left rotation decoration body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back left drive motor 3404. (See FIG. 122 (c)). In this third decoration state, the LED on the back left third decoration board 3417 can emit red light to project the red design on the back left projection unit 3415, and blue light can emit blue design. It can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. Accordingly, the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the player that a chance has arrived, and the player can be entertained or expected.

  Thus, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9i. Moveable directing unit behind the back]
Next, the back and rear movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 136. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the back and rear movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the back and lower back of the moveable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the up / down moving unit of the rear rear movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the up / down unit of the lower rear movable production unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 127 is an explanatory view showing the state of the lifting unit when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative unit is in the lowered end position, and FIG. 128 is a diagram of the lifting unit when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative unit is in the raised end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state from the front.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a front view of the back-under-back movable effect unit, and FIG. 129 (b) is a perspective view of the back-under-rotation body decoration unit of the back-under-movable effect unit as viewed from the front. ) Is a perspective view of the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit of the back and bottom movable production unit as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower rear rotary decoration unit as seen from the rear. 132 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 129 (a).

  Further, FIG. 133 (a) is a front view showing a state in which the back-bottom post-rotation decorative body of the back-bottom post-rotation decoration unit is stopped rotating, and (b) is a front view counterclockwise view of the back-bottom post-rotation decoration body. It is a front view which shows the state currently rotated to the rotation direction, (c) is a front view which shows the state just before a back lower back rotation decoration body opens and rotates to a clockwise direction of a front view, (d ) Is a front view showing a state in which the back and bottom rotating decorative body is rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 134 (a) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the drive mechanism relating to the back-under-rear rotation decoration motor in the back-under-rear rotation decoration body unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the differential mechanism which concerns, (c) is the connection which has connected the drive mechanism which concerns on a back lower back rotation drive motor, and the differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a back lower back rotation decoration body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a mechanism.

  FIG. 135 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connecting mechanism when the back-under-rear rotating decorative body is closed and stopped, and FIG. 135 (b) is an illustration of the back-under rear rotating decorative body being counterclockwise. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when rotating in the direction. FIG. 136 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the coupling mechanism when the back and bottom rotating decorative body is closed and stopped rotating, and FIG. 136 (b) is a diagram illustrating the coupling ring of the drive mechanism in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when it rotates and the back bottom back rotation decoration body is opening, (c) is a back rotation back decoration by the connection ring of a drive mechanism rotating further in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a body opens completely, (d) When the back bottom back rotation decoration body of the open state is rotating clockwise with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of this connection mechanism.

  The rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 is attached below the opening 3010a near the rear end in the back box 3010. The back-behind movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a lifting unit 3510 on which the front-bottom movable effect unit 3200 is mounted on the front surface, and a back-bottom rear-rotating decorative body moved up and down by the lifting unit 3510. A unit 3550.

  The raising / lowering unit 3510 of the rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3511 when viewed from the front of the unit base 3511 and the unit base 3511 attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear back / up / down drive motor 3512 having a rotary shaft protruding forward through the unit base 3511, and a spur gear-like lift / lower drive gear 3513 attached to the rotary shaft of the back / bottom back / up / down drive motor 3512. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3514a meshing with the lifting drive gear 3513, and a second transmission gear 3514b that rotates integrally with the front surface of the first transmission gear 3514a and has a smaller diameter than the first transmission gear 3514a. A transmission gear member 3514 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511, and a transmission And A member second transmission gear 3514b engaged to and unit base 3511 lifting drive pinion gear 3515 rotatably mounted in and spur gear shape of 3514, and a.

  The elevating unit 3510 has a guide slit 3516a extending vertically in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-like detection piece 3516b protruding leftward from the lower left end of the front view. The back and forth base 3516 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3510 so as to be slidable up and down, and the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is slidably attached to the rear surface by a guide slit 3516a. And a lift drive rack gear 3517 that is attached to the rear surface near the left end of the front view and extends vertically and meshes with the lift drive pinion gear 3515, and extends vertically and has an upper end that is the same height as the upper end of the unit base 3511. The fixed rack gear 3 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511 18 and a fixed side rack gear 3518, and a movable rack gear 3551 b extending vertically and attached to the rear surface of the rear back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, and rotatably attached to the lifting base 3516. A spur gear-like acceleration gear 3519.

  Further, the elevating unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511 so as to cover the front of the elevating drive gear 3513, the transmission gear member 3514, the elevating drive pinion gear 3515, and the fixed side rack gear 3518 on the left side of the elevating base 3516 in front view. The left and right gear cover left 3520, the back and bottom back elevation detection sensor 3521 that is attached to the front surface of the gear cover left 3520 and can detect the detection piece 3516b of the elevation base 3516, and the right side of the elevation base 3516 in the front view. A spur gear-shaped guide pinion gear 3522 that is rotatably attached to the front surface of the base 3511, meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522, extends vertically, and is attached to the rear surface on the right end side of the elevation base 3516 in front view. Of the guide rack gear 3523 and the guide rack gear 3523 The gear cover right 3524 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511 and the lower end side are attached to the elevating base 3516, and the upper end side is attached to the gear cover left 3520 and the gear cover right 3524, respectively. And a pair of assist springs 3525 that urge upward.

  The lifting unit 3510 is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3511 on the right end side when viewed from the front. The lifting / lowering unit 3510 is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate base 3526. Detection sensor 3521, back-under-rear rotation drive motor 3553, back-under-rear rotation detection sensor 3570, and back-under-rear relay board relaying the connection between the back-under-rear decoration board 3572, the motor drive board 3062, and the lamp drive board 3060 3527.

  Next, the operation of the elevating unit 3510 in the back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 is positioned at the lower end position where the back lower back rotating decorative body 3550 is lowered most in a normal state. In this lowered end position, as shown in FIG. 127, at the upper end of the lifting drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the lifting base 3516, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide attached to the unit base 3511. Pinion gears 3522 mesh with each other. Further, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the lifting base 3516 is meshed with the lower end of the fixed side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511 and is also movable to the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550. The side rack gear 3551b meshes with the upper end.

  Further, in the state of the lowered end position, the guide pin 3552b of the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the lifting base 3516 via the guide bush 3528 is positioned at the lower end of the guide slit 3516a. ing. Further, in the state of the lowered end position, the detection piece 3516b of the lift base 3516 is detected by the back and bottom lift detection sensor 3521, and the pair of assist springs 3525 extend to urge the lift base 3516 upward. doing.

  As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, when the back-under rear movable decoration unit 3550 is in the lowered end position, the back-under rear movable decoration unit 3500 has the back-bottom rear rotary decoration body 3568 lower than the lower end of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. A part is visible from the player side above the stage 2530 in the frame of the center accessory 2500 below.

  When the rear back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the lower end position, the back and forth rear elevation drive motor 3512 rotates the elevation drive gear 3513 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, so that the elevation drive pinion gear 3515 rotates counterclockwise. The elevating base 3516 is raised by the elevating drive rack gear 3517 that rotates in the direction and meshes with the elevating drive pinion gear 3515. When the elevating base 3516 is raised, the acceleration gear 3519 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516 is also raised together with the elevating base 3516. Since this acceleration gear 3519 meshes with a fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, when the elevating base 3516 (acceleration gear 3519) rises with respect to the unit base 3511, the acceleration gear 3519 is viewed from the front. It will rotate in the clockwise direction.

This acceleration gear 3519 is on the opposite side to the fixed side rack gear 3518 and is engaged with the movable side rack gear 3551b attached to the rear back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, so that the acceleration gear 3519 is counterclockwise. When rotating, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 rises relative to the lifting base 3516 via the movable rack gear 3551b.
At this time, the rear back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is raised at twice the speed of the lifting base 3516 by the acceleration gear 3519 meshing with the fixed side rack gear 3518 of the unit base 3511.

  In the lifting unit 3510, the guide rack gear 3523 on the opposite side of the lifting drive rack gear 3517 in the lifting base 3516 meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3511. The elevating base 3516 can rise straight without the right end side of the base 3516 being twisted. Further, in the lifting unit 3510, the lifting base 3516 is biased upward by the pair of assist springs 3525, so that the load on the back and bottom rear lifting drive motor 3512 is reduced. In the pair of assist springs 3525, the assist spring 3525 on the right side as viewed from the front, which is far from the lifting drive rack gear 3517, is extended longer than the left assist spring 3525, and the urging force is strengthened. doing.

  Then, when the back-under-rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the most elevated position, the back-under-rear lifting drive motor 3512 stops. In the state of the raised end position, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide pin 3552b of the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the upper end of the guide slit 3516a of the lifting base 3516. In the state of the rising end position, the lift drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide pinion gear 3522 attached to the unit base 3511 are respectively provided at the lower ends of the lift drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the lift base 3516. Meshed. Further, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the lifting base 3516 is meshed with the upper end of the fixed side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511 and is movable to the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550. The side rack gear 3551b meshes with the lower end.

  When the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is in the ascending end position, as shown in FIG. 152, the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in front view (the front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500). ). In addition, when the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is in the raised end position and the back and bottom back lifting drive motor 3512 rotates the lifting drive gear 3513 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the reverse operation is performed. Then, the rotating decorative body unit 3550 is lowered and returned to the lowered end position.

  Next, the back bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The rear back rotating decorative body unit 3550 has a cylindrical shaft portion 3551a extending forward from the upper portion, and a movable rack gear 3551b extending vertically on the rear surface of the lower portion and meshing with the acceleration gear 3159. A shallow container-like decorative body base 3551 that extends vertically and is open at the front, and has a diameter larger than that of the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the decoration body base 3551 and penetrates the shaft cylinder portion 3551a in the front-rear direction. Has a through hole 3552a inserted through a concentric circle, and a guide pin 3552b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower part to the front and is inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating unit 3510, and the rear part is open. And a base cover 3552 attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3551 in a shallow box shape.

  Further, the rear back rotation decorative body unit 3550 has a back gear rear rotation drive motor 3553 attached to the lower rear surface of the base cover 3552 and a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shaft of the back bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553. , A spur gear-shaped first driven gear 3555 that meshes with the rotational drive gear 3554 and is rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the first driven gear. 3555, a spur gear-shaped second driven gear 3556 that is rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and a second driven gear 3556 that is engaged with the decorative body base 3551. A spur gear-shaped third driven gear 3557 and a third driven gear 3557 that are rotatably attached to the base cover 3552. A spur gear-shaped fourth driven gear 3558 rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and an annular drive ring gear 3559a meshing with the fourth driven gear 3558. , A plurality of (three in this case) engaging protrusions 3559b protruding in the circumferential direction from the front end of the drive ring gear 3559a, and a flange shape protruding outward from the rear end of the drive ring gear 3559a. A drive gear member 3559 having a drive detection piece 3559c in which a part in the circumferential direction is cut off, four mounting holes 3560a formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear end toward the front The drive gear member 3559 has a plurality of engagement recesses 3560b that are recessed and into which the plurality of engagement projections 3559b of the drive gear member 3559 are inserted and engaged. It has substantially the same size as the outer diameter and coupling ring of the ring-shaped formed on the inner diameter 3560, the.

  The outer diameter and inner diameter of the drive ring gear 3559 and the connecting ring 3560 are smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552 and larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551. Further, the drive ring gear 3559 and the connection ring 3560 have the same inner shape. In the rear back rotation decorative body unit 3550, the back bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553, the rotation drive gear 3554, the first driven gear 3555, the second driven gear 3556, the third driven gear 3557, the fourth driven gear 3558, and the drive gear member. 3559 and the connecting ring 3560 constitute a drive mechanism 3550A that is directly rotated by the rear back rotation drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 134 (a) and the like).

  Further, the rear back rotating decorative body unit 3550 penetrates the through hole 3552a, the connecting ring 3560, and the drive ring member 3559 of the base cover 3552 from the front, and the shaft tube portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551 is inserted. A cylindrical outer tube portion 3561a, a plurality of connecting recesses 3561b that are recessed forward from the rear end of the outer tube portion 3561a and formed at intervals in the circumferential direction, and an outer tube portion 3561a in front of the base cover 3552 Plate-shaped base portion 3561c extending outward from the front end of the base plate, and four guide slits 3561d penetrating back and forth through the base portion 3561c and extending radially about the axis of the outer cylinder portion. The rotating decorative body base 3561, and the rotating decorative body base 3561 are inserted into the outer cylinder portion 3561a and the decorative body base A cylindrical inner tube portion 3562a through which the shaft tube portion 3551a of the shaft 3551 is inserted, a ring-shaped differential ring gear 3562b formed on the outer periphery of the rear end of the inner tube portion 3562a behind the drive gear member 3559, differential A plurality of connection projections 3562c projecting from the front surface of the ring gear 3562b with a gap in the circumferential direction and inserted and connected into the connection recess 3561b of the rotating ornament base 3561, and outward from the rear end of the differential ring gear 3562b. A differential gear member 3562 having a differential detection piece 3562d protruding in a flange shape and partially cut in the circumferential direction is engaged with a differential ring gear 3562b of the differential gear member 3562. A spur gear-shaped differential transmission gear rotatably mounted coaxially with the fourth driven gear 3558 between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552. 563, a spur gear-shaped damper gear 3564 that meshes with the differential transmission gear 3563, and a damper gear 3564 that is rotatably attached to the damper gear 3564 in a state of imparting rotational resistance, and is attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3551. Rotating damper member 3565.

  The outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 3561a in the rotating decorative body base 3561 is slightly smaller than the inner diameters of the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560, and the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560 can be rotated by the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 3561a. It is installed. Further, the inner diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 3562a in the differential gear member 3562. The base portion 3561c is formed larger than the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552. The guide slits 3561d are formed at an interval of 90 degrees with respect to the circumferential direction of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a.

  The inner cylinder portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551, and is rotatably attached by the shaft cylinder portion 3551a. Although not shown in detail, the rotary damper member 3565 gives rotational resistance to the rotary shaft to which the damper gear 3564 is attached by the viscous resistance of the viscous fluid sealed inside. In the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the rotating decorative body base 3561, the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, the damper gear 3564, and the rotating damper member 3565 are directly given rotational resistance by the rotating damper member 3565. The differential mechanism 3550B is configured (see FIG. 134 (b) and the like).

  Further, the rear back rotating decorative body unit 3550 has a cylindrical slide pin 3566a that protrudes rearward through the guide slit 3561d, and each guide is provided on the front surface of the base portion 3561c of the rotating decorative body base 3561. There are four decorative body sliders 3566 that are slidably mounted by slits 3561d, and front end holes 3567a that penetrate the front and rear and are rotatably inserted into the slide pins 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 on the front end side. And has a base end pin 3567b that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably inserted into the mounting hole 3560a of the connection ring 3560, and has four strip-shaped connection arms 3567, Four back bottoms that are attached to the front surface of each decorative body slider 3566 and are decorated on the front surface A rotary decoration member 3568, and a, and four rotation restricting member 3569 which regulates the range of rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the rear surface of the backing under the rotated decorative body 3568.

  The back rear rotating decorative body 3568 is formed in a substantially square shape in front view, one of the four vertices is formed at a right angle, and the opposite vertex on the diagonal passing through the right vertex. Is formed at an acute angle. The lower back rotating decorative body 3568 has a right vertex directed toward the rotation center axis of the rotating decorative body base 3561, and a diagonal line passing through the right vertex corresponds to the sliding direction of the decorative body slider 3566 (guide of the rotating decorative body base 3561. The decorative body slider 3566 is attached so as to extend in the direction in which the slit 3561d extends. The four back-bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 can slide so as to approach and separate from each other by the guide slits 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561.

  In the rear back rotation decoration body unit 3550, a decoration body slider 3666, a connecting arm 3567, a back lower back rotation decoration body 3568, and a rotation restricting member 3569 connect the drive mechanism 3550A and the differential mechanism 3550B to rotate. A transmitting connection mechanism 3550C is configured (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  Further, the rear back rotation decorative body unit 3550 is attached between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the drive detection piece 3559c of the drive gear member 3559 and the differential detection piece 3562d of the differential ring gear 3562. A backside rear rotation detection sensor 3570 for detecting the rotation position of the rotating ornament body base 3561, and a fixed ornament body base 3571 that passes through the center of the rotation ornament body base 3561 from the front and is attached to the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the ornament body base 3551 A back lower back decorative board 3572 attached to the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 in front of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and behind the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; It is attached to the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 between the back lower back decorative substrate 3572 and the back lower back decorative body 3568 Cage front decorated is provided with a disk-shaped subplantar after fixing the decorative body 3573 having a light-transmitting property with are subjected.

  Next, the operation of the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 of the back-under-rear rotation decoration body unit 3550 in the back-under-rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 has four back-bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 35 that slide toward the rotation center side of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and are in contact with each other. In a normal state, the drive gear member 3559 is stopped so that the notched portion of the drive detection piece 3559c is directed leftward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134 (a)). Further, the differential gear member 3562 is stopped with the cutout portion of the differential detection piece 3562d facing rightward in front view (see FIG. 134 (b)). Further, the four connecting arms 3567 have an axis line connecting the center of the base end pin 3567b rotatably attached to the attachment hole 3560a of the connection ring 3560 and the center of the distal end hole 3567a of the connection ring 3560. A slide pin 3566a of a decorative body slider 3566 that extends so as to contact a circle centered on the rotational center and is rotatably attached to the tip hole 3567a is located on the rotational center side of the guide slit 3561d in the rotational decorative body base 3561. Located at the end. Further, in the normal state, the four connecting arms 3567 have distal end holes 3567a that are away from the proximal end pin 3567b in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134C, etc.).

  In this normal state (see FIG. 135 (a) and the like), when the rotation drive gear 3554 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the rear back rotation drive motor 3553, the connection ring 3560 together with the drive gear member 3559 is obtained. Will rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the connection ring 3560 is to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the connection arm 3567 is connected via the proximal pin 3567b attached to the attachment hole 3560a, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connection arm 3567 is the decorative body slider. Since it tries to move away from the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561 attached via the slide pin 3566a of 3566, the slide pin 3566a attached to the tip hole 3560a is within the guide slit 3561d. Try to slide to the center of rotation.

  However, in this normal state, the slide pin 3566a is located at the end of the guide slit 3561d on the rotation center side and cannot slide to the rotation center side any more. Accordingly, the connecting arm 3567 pulls the rotating decorative body base 3561 so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front via the guide slit 3561d. The rotational decoration body base 3561 receives the rotational resistance of the rotational damper member 3565 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, and thus resists the rotational resistance of the rotational damper member 3565. As a result, the rotating ornament base 3561 rotates counterclockwise.

  When the rotating decorative body base 3561 rotates counterclockwise in the front direction, the slide pin 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 is positioned at the end of the guide slit 3561d on the rotation center side, and each decorative body slider The back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 attached to 3566 rotates in a state of being in contact with each other positioned toward the center of rotation (see FIG. 135 (b)). Further, during the rotation of the four back-under-rear rotating decoration bodies 3568 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the decoration body slider 3566 to which the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 is attached. Since the force that slides to the back acts, the back and bottom rotating decorative body 3568 does not slide outward due to the centrifugal force.

  On the other hand, when the rotation drive gear 3554 is rotated counterclockwise by the front rear rotation drive motor 3553 in the normal state (see FIG. 136A, etc.), the drive gear member 3559 is connected together. The ring 3560 will rotate in the clockwise direction. When the connection ring 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the connection arm 3567 is connected to the attachment hole 3560b via the base end pin 3567b, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connection arm 3567 is slid on the decorative body slider 3566. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a is moved via the guide slit 3561d because it tends to move toward the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561 attached via the pin 3666a. An attempt is made to rotate the rotating ornament base 3561 in the clockwise direction.

  However, the rotational ornament body base 3561 is rotated clockwise by the rotational resistance of the rotational damper member 3565 acting through the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564. The slide pin 3566a moves from the center of rotation to the outside direction along the guide slit 3561d (see FIG. 136 (b)). As a result, each slide pin 3566a (decorative body slider 3566) slides outward, so that each back-bottom rear rotating ornament 3568 slides outward so as to be separated from each other.

  When the connection ring 3560 further rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the attachment hole 3560a reaches the axis of the guide slit 3561d in the rotating decorative body base 3561, the connection arm 3567 extends along the guide slit 3561d. At the same time, the side surface of the connecting arm 3567 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3569, and further rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is prevented. In this state, the decorative body slider 3566 is slid to the outermost side via the connecting arm 3567, and the respective back-bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 are opened most apart (see FIG. 136 (c)). ). In addition, in the state in which the back bottom back rotating decorative body 3568 is opened, the back bottom back fixed decorative body 3573 disposed behind the back bottom back rotating decorative body 3568 is visually recognized from between the back bottom back rotating decorative body 3568. (See FIGS. 133 (c) and 133 (d)).

  When the connection ring 3560 further rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view with the back and rear rotating decorative body 3568 open, the rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is restricted by the rotation restricting member 3569, and thus the rotational decorative body The base 3561 rotates in the clockwise direction against the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565, and rotates in the clockwise direction in the state where the back and bottom rotating decorative body 3568 is opened (FIG. 136 ( see d)). By opening the rotating decoration body 3568 after the back, it becomes larger and more conspicuous, and the player can be surprised.

  In addition, when closing the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 in the open state, each of the back and bottom rear rotating drive motor 3553 is rotated by rotating the connecting ring 3567 in the counterclockwise direction in front view opposite to the above. The back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 slides toward the center of rotation and is in a closed state.

  In this way, the back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 moves the back-under-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 to the rising end position so that the back-under-bottom post-rotation decoration body 3568 is moved within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (the game area 5a). ), And the rotating decorative body 3568 can be made conspicuous. In this state, when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the player can be surprised by rotating at the center of the game area 5a. Further, when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 rotates in an open and enlarged state, which can further surprise the player. A variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

[5-9j. Back four corner movable production unit]
Next, the back four-corner movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back four-corner movable effect unit of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the back four-corner movable effect unit of the back unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back four-corner first production unit in the back four-corner movable production unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corners second unit in the back four corners movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corners second unit in the back four corners move effect unit from the rear. FIG.

  FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the normal retreat position state, and FIG. 143 (b) is a state in which the back four corner first decorative body is in the appearance position. It is a front view of a back four corner first unit, (c) is a front view of a back four corner first unit in the state where a back four corner second decoration object appears. Further, FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. 144 (b) is in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a back 4 corner 1st decoration body from an evacuation position to an appearance position, (c) is a back 4 corner 1st unit in an appearance position in a back 4 corner 1 unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time from the left side. FIG. 145 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. 145 (b) is in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a back four corner 2nd decoration body from an evacuation position to an appearance position, (c) is a back 4 corner 2nd decoration body of an appearance position in a back 4 corner 1 unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time from the left side.

  The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 is attached to the four corners outside the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back four corner movable production unit 3600 is a back four corner first unit 3610 attached to the upper right corner and the lower left corner in the four corners in the back box 3010, and a back four corner second unit attached to the upper left corner and the lower right corner in the four corners of the back box 3010. 3650. The back four corner first unit 3610B attached to the lower left corner is attached to the back four corner first unit 3610A attached to the upper right corner in a state of being rotated 180 degrees around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. Further, the back four corner second unit 3650B attached to the lower right corner is attached to the back four corner second unit 3650A attached to the upper left corner in a state of being rotated 180 degrees around the axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  Hereinafter, the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) attached to the upper right corner and the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650A) attached to the upper left corner will be described, and the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610B) attached to the lower left corner. ) And the back four-corner second unit 3650 (3650B) attached to the lower right corner are only rotated 180 degrees with respect to those attached to the upper right corner and the upper left corner, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the back four corner first unit 3610 includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3611 mounted in the back box 3010 and open at the rear and lower sides, and a front surface of the unit base 3611. Is attached to the left side surface of the motor base 3612 and a shallow box-shaped motor base 3612 which is attached to substantially the center in the left-right direction and whose left side (facing the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010) is open. The motor base cover 3613 covers the front side of the left side of the left side of the motor base 3612 that is open, and is attached to the left side of the motor base 3612 behind the front 3613 of the motor base cover. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3614 whose right side and front side are open, and a right side surface of the motor base 3612 It is attached to the front four corner drive motor 3615 with the rotation shaft projecting into the motor base 3612 and the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3615 so that the left side is covered with the motor base cover front 3613. And a transmission member 3616 accommodated in the motor base 3612.

  The transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical attachment shaft portion 3616a attached to the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3615, a disk-like base portion 3616b extending from the tip of the attachment shaft portion 3616a in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a base A detection piece 3616c protruding in a plate shape to the right from a surface facing right in the portion 3616b, a first transmission portion 3617 provided on a surface facing left of the base portion 3616b, and a base portion And a second transmission portion 3618 provided on a surface facing the right side of 3616b.

  The first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3617a projecting leftward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and the revolution of the first transmission pin 3617a. Between the first lock protrusion 3617b and the first lock protrusion 3617b and the first transmission pin 3617a, which protrude to the left concentrically from the left surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, A fan-shaped cutout from a uniform range to both sides from the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the first transmission pin 3617a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock projection 3617b toward the center of the first lock projection 3617b A first notch 3617c.

  The second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616 includes a columnar second transmission pin 3618a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3618a. A cylindrical second lock projection 3618b that protrudes rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3618b and the second transmission pin 3618a, A fan-shaped cutout from the equal range to both sides from the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the second transmission pin 3618a on the outer peripheral surface of the two lock projections 3618b toward the center of the second lock projection 3618b A second cutout portion 3618c.

  In the transmission member 3616, the revolution radius of the first transmission pin 3617a and the second transmission pin 3618a is the same. Further, the second transmission pin 3618a protrudes from the position rotated 180 degrees around the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b with respect to the first transmission pin 3617a. Furthermore, the diameters of the first lock protrusion 3617b and the second lock protrusion 3618b are the same. Further, in the transmission member 3616, the first notch 3617c of the first transmission part 3617 and the second notch 3618c of the second transmission part 3618 are arranged on the circumference of the first lock projection 3617b and the second lock projection 3618b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape within an angle range of 72 degrees.

  Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 includes a cylindrical transmission shaft member 3619 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 at positions rearward of the transmission member 3616, and a transmission shaft. The working member 3619 has a working arm 3620 a that is rotatably attached by passing through the member 3619 and is rotated by being transmitted by the rotation of the transmission member 3616 from the first transmission portion 3617 and extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a link shaft member 3621 whose both ends are attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 below the first transmitted member 3620 directly below the transmitted shaft member 3619. The link shaft member 3621 is rotatably mounted by passing through the proximal end side. A link arm 3622 extending in the direction perpendicular to the working arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the working arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620. Further, the distal end of the link arm 3622 is rotatably attached so that the link arm 3622 extends in parallel with the action arm 3620a below the upper end, and a link member 3623 extending downward, and a lower end of the link member 3623 A back four corner first decorative body 3624 attached to the front and dressed as a shuriken, and a back four corner first decorative board 3625 attached to the rear surface of the back four corner first decorative body 3624 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front. And.

  The first transmitted member 3620 has a working arm 3620a extending from the left end and a shaft portion 3620b through which the transmitted shaft member 3619 passes, and a right end of the shaft portion 3620b extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A disc-shaped first transmitted body 3620c, a first transmission slit 3620d that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted body 3620c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3617a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3620d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3620c, there is a pair of first lock recesses 3620e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  In the first transmission slit 3620d, the direction in which the first transmission slit 3620d opens in the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted body 3620c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3620a extends. The first lock recess 3620e is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617. The pair of first lock recesses 3620e is formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3620 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back four corner first unit 3610 (the back four corner movable production unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted member 3620 includes the first transmitted body 3620c and the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617. The first lock protrusion 3617b and the position in the left-right direction are the same. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3617a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d, and the rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3617a and the first transmission slit 3620d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, thereby The rotation of the transmitted member 3620 can be restricted (locked).

  The link member 3623 is rotatably attached to the distal end of the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 and the distal end of the link arm 3622 by link pins 3626, respectively. In addition, a link cover 3627 is attached to the upper front portion of the link member 3623. The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3612, the action arm 3620 a of the first transmitted member 3620, the link arm 3622, and the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620. , The back four corners first decorative body 3624 can be moved up and down via the link member 3623.

  Further, the back four corners first unit 3610 closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3611 and has a flat base cover 3628 attached to the unit base 3611 and a columnar transmitted shaft member extending left and right. It has a second action pin 3629a that revolves around 3619, and is attached rotatably by a transmission shaft member 3619 passing between the motor base 3612 and the first transmission member 3620. Revolving around the axis extending in the front-rear direction due to the revolution of the second transmitted member 3629 that rotates by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3618 in the transmitting member 3616 and the second action pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629. The first connecting pin 3630a extends rearward in a columnar shape, and the unit base is positioned behind the transmission shaft member 3619. Rotation coupling member 3630 rotatably attached by a base 3611 and a base cover 3628, and a unit base 3611 and a base cover 3628 below the rotation coupling member 3630 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. And a back four-corner second decorative body base 3631 having a second connecting pin 3631a projecting in a columnar shape rearward at a position eccentric from the rotation center.

  Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connecting pin 3630a of the rotary connecting member 3630 and the opposite end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. A belt-like connecting arm 3632 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3631a, and a back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the front surface of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 and extending in an arc shape. The back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the rear surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3633 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the rear surface near the front end. And a substrate cover 3635 that covers a part of the rear four corners second decorative substrate 3634 and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3616 that is attached to the motor base 3612. A back corner lift detection sensor 3636 that can detect 6c, and a.

  In the second transmitted member 3629, a second action pin 3629a protrudes from the periphery to the right, a disk-shaped second transmitted body portion 3629b centered on the transmitted shaft member 3619, and a second transmitted body portion 3629b. On both sides of the second transmission slit 3629c that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmission slit 3629c into which the second transmission pin 3618a is slidably inserted, and the second transmission slit 3629c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body 3629b. And a pair of second lock recesses 3629d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction of the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body 3629b is opposite to the second action pin 3629a across the transmitted shaft member 3619. It is suitable. The second lock recess 3629d is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618. The pair of second lock recesses 3629d is formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back four-corner first unit 3610 (back four-corner movable production unit 3600) is assembled, the second transmitted member 3629 includes the second transmitted main body 3629b and the second transmitting pin 3618a of the second transmitting unit 3618 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock protrusion 3618b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3618a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c, and rotation can be transmitted through the second transmission pin 3618a and the second transmission slit 3629c. Further, a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, and a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, so that the second The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotation connecting member 3630 extends in a fan shape from the center of rotation in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and has a plate-like main body portion 3630b in which the first connection pin 3630a protrudes rearward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface, and a plate from the periphery of the main body portion 3630b to the front. The projecting piece 3630c projecting in a shape and a part of the projecting piece 3630c are notched so that the second action pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. Two actuated parts 3630d.

  The rotation connecting member 3630 is attached with the rotation center at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629. In the rotation connecting member 3630, the second acting member 3629 rotates and the second action pin 3629a revolves, whereby the second acting part 3630d is pressed by the second action pin 3629a and rotates.

  The back four corner second decorative body 3633 is formed in the shape of a blade of a blade such as a shuriken or a sword.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3628, the rotation connecting member 3630, the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the connection arm 3632, and when the rotation connecting member 3630 rotates. The back four corner second decorative body base 3631 rotates in the same direction through the connecting arm 3632. Accordingly, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 can be rotated (turned) so that the front end side thereof is directed downward.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 141 and FIG. 142, the back four corner second unit 3650 includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3651 mounted in the back box 3010 and opened rearward and downward, and a unit base 3651 A shallow box-shaped motor base 3652 that is attached to the front surface at substantially the center in the left-right direction and that opens to the right (the one that faces the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010), and is attached to the right side surface of the motor base 3652. The motor base cover front 3653 covering the front side of the front side in the front-rear direction of the right side surface of the motor base 3652 that is open, and attached to the right side of the motor base 3652 behind the motor base cover front 3653. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3654 that is open on the left side and the front side, and the left side of the motor base 3652 The back four corner drive motor 3655 with the rotation shaft protruding into the motor base 3652 and the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3655 and the right side is covered with the motor base cover front 3653. The transmission member 3656 accommodated in the motor base 3652 is provided.

  The transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical attachment shaft portion 3656a attached to the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3655, a disk-like base portion 3656b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the attachment shaft portion 3656a, and a base A detection piece 3656c protruding in a plate shape to the right from a surface facing right in the portion 3656b, a first transmission portion 3657 provided on a surface facing right of the base portion 3656b, and a base portion A second transmission portion 3658 provided on a surface facing the left side of 3656b.

  The first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 includes a columnar first transmission pin 3657a projecting rightward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3656b and parallel to the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and the revolution of the first transmission pin 3657a. A cylindrical first lock protrusion 3657b that protrudes rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock protrusion 3657b and the first transmission pin 3657a, A fan-shaped cutout from the equal range to both sides from the axis line connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the first transmission pin 3657a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock projection 3657b toward the center of the first lock projection 3657b. A first notch 3657c.

  The second transmission portion 3658 of the transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3658a projecting leftward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3656b and parallel to the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3658a. A cylindrical second lock projection 3658b projecting leftward from the left surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3658b and the second transmission pin 3658a, A fan-shaped cutout from the equal range on both sides to the center of the second lock projection 3658b from the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the second transmission pin 3658a on the outer peripheral surface of the two lock projection 3658b A second notch 3658c.

  In the transmission member 3656, the revolution radius of the first transmission pin 3657a and the second transmission pin 3658a is the same. The second transmission pin 3658a protrudes from the first transmission pin 3657a from a position rotated 180 degrees around the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b. Furthermore, the diameters of the first lock protrusion 3657b and the second lock protrusion 3658b are the same. Further, the transmission member 3656 has a first notch portion 3657c of the first transmission portion 3657 and a second notch portion 3658c of the second transmission portion 3658 arranged on the circumference of the first lock projection 3657b and the second lock projection 3658b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape within an angle range of 72 degrees.

  The back four corner second unit 3650 includes a cylindrical transmission shaft member 3659 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 at positions rearward of the transmission member 3656, and a transmission shaft. The member 3659 is rotatably attached by penetrating the member 3659 and has a working arm 3660a extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis by transmitting the rotation of the transmission member 3656 from the first transmission portion 3657. And a link shaft member 3661 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 below the first transmitted member 3660 directly below the transmitted shaft member 3659. The link shaft member 3661 is rotatably mounted by passing through the proximal end side. A link arm 3662 extending in the direction perpendicular to the working arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 in the direction perpendicular thereto, and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the working arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660. Further, the distal end of the link arm 3661 is rotatably attached so that the link arm 3661 extends in parallel with the action arm 3660a below the upper end, and a link member 3663 extending downward, and a lower end of the link member 3663 The back four corners first decorative body 3664 attached to the front and dressed as a shuriken, and the back four corners first decorative board 3665 attached to the rear surface of the back four corners first decorative body 3664 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front. And.

  The first transmitted member 3660 has a working arm 3660a extending from the left end and a shaft portion 3660b through which the transmitted shaft member 3659 passes, and a right end of the shaft portion 3660b extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A disc-shaped first transmitted body 3660c, a first transmission slit 3660d that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted body 3660c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3657a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3660d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3660c, there is a pair of first lock recesses 3660e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  In the first transmission slit 3660d, the direction of opening in the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted body 3660c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3660a extends. The first lock recess 3660e is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3657b of the first transmission portion 3657. The pair of first lock recesses 3660e is formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3660 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back four corners second unit 3650 (back four corners movable production unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted member 3660 includes the first transmitted body 3660c and the first transmission pin 3657a of the first transmission unit 3657 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock protrusion 3657b. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3657a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3660d, and the rotation can be transmitted via the first transmission pin 3657a and the first transmission slit 3660d. Further, a part of the first lock projection 3657b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, and a part of the first lock projection 3657b is inserted into the first lock recess 3660e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3660 can be restricted (locked).

  To the link member 3663, the tip of the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 and the tip of the link arm 3661 are rotatably attached by link pins 3666, respectively. Further, a link cover 3667 is attached to the upper front portion of the link member 3663. The back four-corner second unit 3650 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3652, the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660, the link arm 3661, and the link member 3663, and the first transmitted member 3660. , The back four corners first decorative body 3664 can be moved up and down via the link member 3663.

  Further, the back four corners second unit 3650 closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3651, has a flat base cover 3668 attached to the unit base 3651, and a columnar transmitted shaft member extending left and right. The second action pin 3669a revolves around the center 3659, and the transmission shaft member 3659 passes between the motor base 3652 and the first transmission member 3660 so as to be rotatable. Revolving around the axis extending in the front-rear direction due to the revolution of the second transmitted member 3669 rotated by the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3658 in the transmitting member 3656 and the second action pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669. The first connecting pin 3670a extends in a columnar shape to the rear, and the unit base is located behind the transmitted shaft member 3659. Rotation coupling member 3670 rotatably attached by the base 3651 and the base cover 3668, and the unit base 3651 and the base cover 3668 below the rotation coupling member 3670 so as to be rotatable around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. And a back four-corner second decorative body base 3671 having a second connecting pin 3671a protruding rearward in a columnar shape at a position eccentric from the center of rotation.

  Further, the back four corner second unit 3650 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connecting pin 3670a of the rotary connecting member 3670, and the opposite end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671. A band-plate-like connecting arm 3672 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3671a and a back-four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the front surface of the back four-corner second decorative body base 3671 and extending in an arc shape. And a back four corner second decorative board 3684 which is attached to the rear surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3673 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear surface near the tip of the back four corner second decorative body 3673. And a board cover 3675 that covers a part of the rear four corners second decorative board 3684 and a detection piece 36 of a transmission member 3656 that is attached to the motor base 3652. A back corner lift detection sensor 3676 that can detect 6c, and a.

  In the second transmitted member 3669, a second action pin 3669a protrudes from the periphery to the left, a disk-shaped second transmitted body portion 3669b centering on the transmitted shaft member 3659, and a second transmitted body portion 3669b. On the both sides of the second transmission slit 3669c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body 3669b and the second transmission slit 3669c in which the second transmission pin 3658a is slidably inserted. And a pair of second lock recesses 3669d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction of the second transmission slit 3669c of the second transmitted member 3669 that opens to the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted body 3669b is opposite to the second action pin 3669a across the transmitted shaft member 3659. It is suitable. The second lock recess 3669d is recessed with an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3658b of the second transmission portion 3658. The pair of second lock recesses 3669d are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back four-corner second unit 3650 (back four-corner movable production unit 3600) is assembled, the second transmitted member 3669 includes the second transmitted body 3669b and the second transmitting pin 3658a of the second transmitting unit 3658. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock protrusion 3658b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3658a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3669c, and the rotation can be transmitted via the second transmission pin 3658a and the second transmission slit 3669c. Further, a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, and a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b is inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, so that the second The rotation of the transmitted member 3669 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotary connecting member 3670 extends in a fan shape from the center of rotation in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a plate-like main body portion 3670b in which a first connecting pin 3670a protrudes rearward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface, and a plate from the periphery of the main body portion 3670b to the front. A protruding piece 3670c protruding in a shape and a part of the protruding piece 3670c are notched so that the second action pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. Two actuated portions 3670d.

  The rotation connecting member 3670 is attached at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669. In the rotation connecting member 3670, when the second transmitted member 3669 rotates and the second action pin 3669a revolves, the second acting part 3670d is pressed by the second action pin 3669a and rotates.

  The back four corner second decorative body 3673 is formed in the shape of the blade edge of a knife such as a shuriken or a sword, and the narrowed side of the blade edge is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671.

  The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3668, the rotation connecting member 3670, the back four corner second decorative body base 3671, and the connecting arm 3672, and when the rotation connecting member 3670 rotates. The back four corner second decorative body base 3671 rotates in the same direction via the connecting arm 3672. Thus, the back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 can be rotated (turned) so that the tip side thereof is directed downward.

  Subsequently, operations of the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. The back four-corner movable production unit 3600 includes a back four-corner first unit 3610 and a back four-corner second unit 3650. The back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four-corner second decorative boards 3634 and 3675, and the board covers 3635 and 3675. The back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative substrates 3634 and 3675, and the substrate covers 3635 and 3675 are formed point symmetrical. Accordingly, here, only the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) in the upper right corner when viewed from the front will be described, and description of the other back four corner first unit 3610B and the back four corner second unit 3650 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a) and the like, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 (back four corner first unit 3610) is in a state in which the back four corner first decorative body 3624 moving up and down approaches the unit base 3611. In addition, the rotating back four corner second decorative body 3633 extends horizontally. In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 and the back four corners second decorative body 3633 are located at a retracted position that is hardly visible from the player side.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIGS. 144 (a) and 145 (a), in the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is located immediately above the rotation center, and The second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 is located immediately below the rotation center. In a normal state, the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 extends obliquely upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d opens obliquely upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d. The first lock projection 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617 is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e below the first lock recess 3620e. Thus, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 is positioned at the rising end via the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620 is locked so as not to rotate.

  In a normal state, in the second transmitted member 3629, the second action pin 3629a is positioned obliquely upward and rearward with respect to the rotation center, and the second transmission slit 3629c opens obliquely downward and forward. The second lock projection 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618 is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c. As a result, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 extends substantially horizontally via the rotary connecting member 3630, the connecting arm 3632, and the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the second transmitted member 3629 cannot be rotated. Locked. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636.

  In this normal state, when the transmission member 3616 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view so that the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 moves rearward by the back four corner drive motor 3615, the first The transmission pin 3617a revolves so as to move rearward and enters the first transmission slit 3620d of the first transmitted member 3620, and at the same time, the first lock protrusion 3617b is released from the first lock recess 3620e and locked. The first transmitted member 3620 is rotated and released. Further, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636 is in a non-detected state. When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves counterclockwise, the first transmission pin 3617a presses the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3620d downward, and the first transmitted member 3620 pushes the transmitted shaft member 3619. It will rotate in the clockwise direction around the center.

  When the first transmitted member 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the tip of the action arm 3620a extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis rotates so that the action arm 3620a moves downward. The back four corner first decorative body 3624 moves downward through the link member 3623 attached to the tip (see FIG. 144 (b)). At this time, since the link member 3623 is attached by a parallel link by the action arm 3620a and the link arm 3622, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 moves downward in the same posture.

  On the other hand, in the second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves away from the second transmitted member 3629, and the second lock projection 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d. In addition, the second transmitted member 3629 does not rotate, and the back four corners second decorative body 3633 does not rotate from the retracted position.

  When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves counterclockwise in the left side view and is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3620 stops, and the first four corners of the first decoration The downward movement of the body 3624 stops (see FIGS. 143 (b) and 144 (c)). When the first transmission pin 3617a is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the first lock projection 3617b enters the first lock recess 3620e above the first transmission slit 3620d, and the first lock projection 3617b The rotation of one transmission member 3620 is locked. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate further in the clockwise direction, and the back four corners first decorative body 3624 is maintained in a stopped state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 154, the back four corners first decorative body 3624 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 and can be viewed from the player side. That is, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 is in the state of the appearance position.

  When the back four corner first decorative body 3624 is in the appearance position, the back four corner drive motor 3615 rotates the transmission member 3616 in the opposite direction (clockwise in the left side view), the reverse of the above. By operating, the first transmitted member 3620 rotates counterclockwise, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 rises via the action arm 3620a, and returns to the normal state (retracted position state). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 stops. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (first transmission portion 3617), the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3617a is inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d is the first specific rotation range.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 is in a normal state (the state shown in FIG. 145 (a)), and the transmission member 3616 is moved so that the second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 is moved rearward by the back four corner drive motor 3615. Is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves so as to move rearward and enters the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629, and at the same time, the second The lock projection 3618b is released from the second lock recess 3629d and the lock is released, and the second transmitted member 3629 becomes rotatable. Further, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636 is in a non-detected state. When the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3618a presses the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3629c upward, and the second transmitted member 3629 centers on the transmitted shaft member 3619. Will rotate counterclockwise.

  When the second transmitted member 3629 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the second action pin 3629a of the second received member 3629 revolves so as to move downward, and below the second action pin 3629a. , The rotation coupling member 3630 rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) so that the second operated portion 3630d of the rotation coupling member 3630 moves downward. When the rotating connecting member 3630 rotates, the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 connected by the connecting arm 3632 rotates in the same direction as the rotating connecting member 3630 and is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. The back four-corner second decorative body 3633 is also rotated in the same direction (the direction in which the tip side moves downward, that is, the direction around the anti-emetic blood in front view) (see FIG. 145 (d)).

  On the other hand, in the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a revolves away from the first transmitted member 3620, and the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. The first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate, and the back four corners first decorative body 3624 does not move from the retracted position.

  Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction in the left side view and is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3629c, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3629 stops, and the back four corners second decorative body The rotation of the tip of 3633 toward the lower side stops (see FIGS. 143 (c) and 145 (c)). When the second transmission pin 3618a is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3629c, the second lock projection 3618b enters the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c, and the second lock projection 3618b The rotation of the two transmitted members 3629 is locked. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 is not further rotated counterclockwise, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is maintained in a state where the rotation is stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 143 (c), the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is inclined by about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and as shown in FIG. 153, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is centered. It can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2500. That is, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is in the appearance position.

  When the transmission member 3616 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side) by the back four corner drive motor 3615 with the back corner second decorative body 3633 in the appearance position, the above is reversed. As a result, the second transmitted member 3629 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the back four-corner second decorative body 3633 rotates through the rotary connecting member 3630, the connecting arm 3632, and the like so that the tip end side thereof is raised. The normal state (retracted position state) is restored. Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 stops. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (second transmission portion 3618), the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3618a is inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c is the second specific rotation range.

  As described above, the back four-corner movable production unit 3600 causes the back four-corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 to appear or the back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 to appear by the rotation of one back four-corner drive motor 3615 and 3655. And a back four corner first unit 3610A in the upper right corner, a back four corner first unit 3610B in the lower left corner, a back four corner second unit 3650A in the upper left corner, and a back four corner second unit 3650B in the lower right corner. Since each of them can be operated independently, more various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-10. Movable production on game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 154. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the upper movable decoration body of the upper movable effect unit in the center role. FIG. 147 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the back upper decoration body of the back movable movable unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position, and FIG. 148 is a back decoration of the back movable movable unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board in which the body is in the second appearance position, and the back bottom front first decorative body and the back bottom front second decorative body of the back bottom front movable effect unit are in the appearance position.

  In addition, FIG. 149 shows that the pair of shutters is open with the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the back left rotation effect unit of the back left movable effect unit It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position of the back left protrusion decoration object in the state where the 1st decoration surface of the decoration object was turned ahead. Further, FIG. 150 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with their second decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG. FIG. 151 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with their third decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG.

  Further, FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-under-rear rotating decorative body of the back-under-back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated counterclockwise at the rising end position. Further, FIG. 153 shows the rear back and rear rotating decorative body of the rear back movable movable unit in the back unit rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front at the rising end position, and the back four corner second of the back four corner movable directivity unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of a decoration body appearance position. FIG. 154 is a front view of the gaming board showing the back four corner first decorative body of the back four corner movable effect unit in the back unit in the appearance position.

  As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, in the game board 5, in a normal state, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed rearwardly through the frame of the center accessory 2500 is well visible from the player side. can do. In the normal state, the upper movable ornament 2561 of the upper movable effect unit 2560 in the center accessory 2500 is raised, and the first rotary ornament 2572 and the second rotary ornament of the lower movable effect unit 2570. The body 2573 and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are stopped from rotating. Furthermore, in a normal state, the back upper decoration body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is positioned at a retreat position on the upper rear side from the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed, and a part thereof It is in a state where it protrudes downward from the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 and can be visually recognized from the player side.

  Further, in a normal state, the back bottom front first decorative body 3209 and the back bottom front second decorative body 3212 of the front back front movable effect production unit 3200 are visible from the player side behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It is located in a difficult retreat position. Further, in a normal state, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 are respectively forward (front) of the first decorative surfaces 3310a and 3410a. Further, the pair of shutters 3312 of the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 are closed, and the two back-left protruding decoration bodies 3421 of the back-left rotation decoration body 3410 are the back-left rotation decoration. The body 3410 is located at a retracted position that is invisible.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, the back bottom back rotating decoration body 3568 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 is located at the lower end position, and a part can be seen from the lower side of the center accessory 2500 so that it can be seen from the player side. It faces the frame. Further, in a normal state, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 of the back four corner movable effect production unit 3600 are from within the frame of the center accessory 2500 that is difficult to see from the player side. Is also located in the outward retracted position.

  This game board 5 is displayed on the table according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by accepting game balls from the normal state at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Movable production unit 2560, front and lower movable production unit 2570, back upper movable production unit 3100, back lower front movable production unit 3200, back right movable production unit 3300, back left movable production unit 3400, back lower rear movable production unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the upper movable effect unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500, the upper movable decorative body 2561 is lowered from the normal position by the rotational drive of the upper drive motor 2563, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is moved. It is located at the upper front (see FIG. 146). As a result, the upper part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is covered with the upper movable decorative body 2561, so that the player can think that the gaming state will change, and the expectation for the game will be enhanced. be able to.

  Further, in the lower and upper movable effect unit 2570 of the center accessory 2500, the first rotating decorative body 2572, the second rotating decorative body 2573, and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are rotated by the back lower drive motor 2575 ( See FIG. 96 (b)). Thereby, it can be made to think that there is something good for a player, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  Further, in the back movable production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back top decorative body 3152 is lowered from the retracted position to the first appearance position by the rotational drive of the back top drive motor 3103 with the top and bottom reversed ( (See FIG. 147). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the backside decorative body 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a are partially visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. it can. As a result, the predetermined character deceived by the back decorative body 3152 looks upside down from above, so that the player can be surprised and entertained by the appearance of the character. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. In this state, when the back upper auxiliary decoration body 3157 is reciprocated left and right by the rotational drive of the upper back auxiliary drive motor 3159, the pupil (sub decoration 3157a) of a predetermined character being deceived by the upper upper decoration body 3152 ) Will sway left and right, which can surprise the player and entertain the movable performance.

  Further, in the backside movable effect unit 3100, the backside decorative body 3152 is further moved to the lower second appearance position by the rotational driving of the backside drive motor 3103 while the backside decorative body 3152 is in the first appearance position. (See FIG. 148). When the backside decorative body 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being deceived by the backtop decorative body 3152 is reversed, and the top and bottom is in a normal state. Since it descends while rotating, the movement of the back upper decoration body 3152 becomes a dynamic movement, which can attract the player's interest strongly and can greatly surprise the player.

  In the state where the back decorative body 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the drawing, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being deceived by the back top decorative body 3152 is in a normal state, and the back decorative body 3152 is It is located approximately in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500. Thereby, the back decorative body 3152 becomes conspicuous in the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and it can be greatly anticipated that an advantageous gaming state will occur to the player. . Even in the state of the second appearance position, the rotation of the back side auxiliary drive motor 3159 can turn the eyes of the predetermined character that is being deceived by the back side decoration body 3152 to the left and right, making the player more enjoyable. Can do.

  In this back movable production unit 3100, the back top decorative body 3152 is moved up and down between the retracted position and the first appearance position, moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, Can be moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and at the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the pupil can be prevented from jerking. By combining them, it is possible to perform a variety of movable effects and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Further, in the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, when the rear upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is in the second appearance position, the rear lower front drive motor 3202 is rotated to drive the back of the retracted position. The lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance position located in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 148). Thus, as shown in the figure, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 with a hand is positioned in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 with a head (face), so that a predetermined character casts a spell. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in a normal state (a state where the first decorative surface 3310 is stopped to rotate forward). Thus, the inner decorative body 3313 is caused to face forward from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 149), and the inner decorative body 3313 is decorated with light emission. Thereby, the arrival of an opportunity etc. can be suggested to a player.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state is changed, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotating decorative body 3310 to stop the second decorative surface 3310b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back right character decoration 3318 of the second decorative surface 3310b can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the player can foresee the arrival of the chance by the recognition of the back right character decoration 3318.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotating decorative body 3310 to stop the third decorative surface 3310c toward the front (front) (see FIG. 151). As a result, the ball guiding member 3322 that spirals up and down in the back right effect space 3321 can be viewed from the player side, so that the game ball is supplied to the player in the back right effect space 3321. It is possible to make it seem that the timing of the game being played, that is, the upper prize winning opening 2006 will be opened, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back left rotation is performed by driving the back left decoration body solenoid 3422 in a normal state (a state in which the first decorative surface 3410 is stopped to rotate forward). A back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 149). As a result, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 projects from the back left rotating decorative body 3410 that rotates in a cylindrical shape, which can surprise the player and suggest that there may be something good. Can increase the expectation of the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is rotated by the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3404. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state is changed, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation motor 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the first decorative surface 3410a forward (front) (see FIG. 83 and the like). Since this first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 simulating a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back-right movable effect unit 3300 for the player. Similarly to the above, the door decoration 3411 can be thought to be opened, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the second decorative surface 3410b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back left character decoration 3413 of the second decorative surface 3410b can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the player can foresee the arrival of the chance by the recognition of the back left character decoration 3413.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the third decorative surface 3410c forward (front) (see FIG. 151). And although illustration is omitted, in this state, when red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decorative board 3417, a red pattern can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and blue light is emitted. Then, the blue symbol can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. Accordingly, the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the player that a chance has arrived, and the player can be entertained or expected.

  The back-right movable effect unit 3300 and the back-left moveable effect unit 3400 rotate the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back-left rotation decoration body 3410 at the same time with the left and right ends (in the frame of the center accessory 2500). A movable effect can be performed on both the left and right outer sides of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the rotating back-right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back-left rotating decorative body 3410 enhance the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to. In addition, by appropriately selecting a decorative surface for stopping the rotation of the back-right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back-left rotation decoration body 3410, it is possible to diversify the patterns of the movable effects and make it difficult for the player to get bored. .

  Further, in the back-under-back movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back-under-bottom post-rotation decoration body 3568 is moved to a rising end position that is substantially the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 by the rotational drive of the back-bottom back-up / down drive motor 3512. To rise. Then, when the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the back lower back rotating drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 152). ). As a result, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 that is slightly desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 rises and is positioned at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player You can be surprised and think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation for the game. In addition, since the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the game.

  Also, in the back-under-back movable production unit 3500, when the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back-under-rear rotation rotation motor 3553 rotates the back-under-rear rotation decoration body 3568 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the four back and bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 are opened and rotated so as to be separated from each other (see FIG. 153). Thereby, since the diameter of the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 becomes larger than when rotating counterclockwise, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the game.

Further, in the back four corner movable production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 are positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the retracted position by the rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. It moves up and down to the appearance position (see FIG. 154).
Thus, the appearance of the four back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 can surprise the player and suggest the arrival of a chance or the like.

  Further, in the back four-corner movable production unit 3600, the back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 by the rotational driving of the back four-corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. Move (see FIG. 153). As a result, the appearance of the four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 extending radially from the center of the center of the center object 2500 can surprise the player and something good. It can be thought that there is, and it can raise the expectation for the game. The back four-corner movable effect unit 3600 rotates the back four-corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 to the appearance position when the back-bottom rear-rotate decorative body 3568 of the back-bottom rear-movable effect unit 3500 is at the rising end position. It can appear as if a large shuriken has appeared in the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 153). Thereby, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state has occurred, to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible, and to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board (particularly the main control MPU mounted on the main control board) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the main control board according to this embodiment first performs various registers and main control as a process of step S1 on the condition that a RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated. Data stored in the internal RAM is initialized. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display are stopped. Special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for lottery processing for display mode, variable random numbers used for lottery processing for a predetermined time (variable time) required for variable display control of the special symbol The reach random number used in the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect as the game effect executed in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and a big hit based on the special random number When the determination is made, the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) used for the lottery process for determining the type of the big hit, Etc. random number is subjected to such a lottery process to drop (usually random), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 155 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2305, the first start port sensor 2107, the second start port sensor 2325, the upper large winning port sensor 2552, the lower large winning port sensor 2354, and the general winning port sensor 3050. For example, detection signals from various sensors are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the process of step S14. Run. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second symbol) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process related to a win as an operation trigger of the second start door member 2323 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.
In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board is configured so that the drive frequency of the second start door member 2323 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding some big hits). A lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, such a short time state is realized by shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, in the time-short state control (referred to as time-shortening control), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 1 (per 100%), and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not set. When it is shortened to a predetermined time (for example, 0.08 seconds) shorter than the short-time state and the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is, for example, It is moved forward for 5.5 seconds to allow the game ball to be received at the second start port 2004 and then retracted again to disable the game ball from being received at the second start port 2004.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-short control, the second start is performed by setting the normal symbol winning probability to 0% and setting the time required for the normal symbol variation display control to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds). The game ball cannot be received in the mouth 2004. In the non-short-time state, the normal symbol winning probability may be 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that of the short-time state (for example, 50%), and the normal symbol lottery result is a win. Then, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced for a time shorter than the time-short state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2004 again. You may make it reverse | omit and accept the game ball to the 2nd starting port 2004.

  That is, in the non-time-short state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0%. In this case, even if the player hits the right, it is impossible to win a game ball at the second starting port 2004. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center object 2500 (so-called “left” so that many game balls win the first start port 2002 instead of the second start port 2004. It is preferable to hit “)”.

  On the other hand, in the short time state, the normal symbol winning probability is 100%, and the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, it is easy to win a game ball to the second starting port 2004 by hitting right. Therefore, in the short-time state, the game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called “right-handed”) so that many game balls win the second start port 2004, not the first start port 2002. ") Is preferred.

  In addition, as the time reduction control, the control for increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol than the non-time reduction state, the control for shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol than the non-time reduction state, Control for extending the time period for advancing the two start port door members 2323 from the non-temporal state, control for increasing the number of times the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced than for the non-time state, Of the control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display or the second special symbol display (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the central liquid crystal display device 1500) than the non-short-time state Any one or any combination (or all) may be executed.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board then performs the special symbol process in step S16. Processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board or the like is performed. Next, as a process in step S17, a process is performed in which the command set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board in the normal symbol process.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 2107, the second start port sensor 2325, the upper big prize port sensor 2552, and the lower big prize port sensor 2354. When a detection signal from the general winning a prize opening sensor 3050 or the like is in an ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board so that a prize ball corresponding to the signal is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 2107 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball wins the second start port 2004 and the second start. When the mouth sensor 2325 is turned on, “1 ball”, a game ball wins a prize at the above-mentioned winning prize opening (upper winning prize opening 2006, lower winning prize opening 2005) and an upper winning prize sensor 2552 or a lower winning prize sensor 2354. Is turned “14 balls”, a game ball is won in the general prize opening 2001, and when the general prize opening sensor 3050 is turned on, “10 balls” are paid out to the player. ing.

  Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of holdings as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU of the main control board is first detected by the first start port sensor 2107. On condition that the signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the main control built-in RAM. The first start port passing process such as storing in the first special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2325 is in the ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start-pass passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped are “4R normal jackpot”. , “4R latent chance big hit”, or “4R chance variation big hit” is suggested, after the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or lower big prize winning opening 4R big hit gaming state (4R big hit gaming state simply open for a long time) that repeats the open / close pattern (round) to be closed four times when the lower big prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won in 2005 The result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R sudden hit big hit". In addition, the opening / closing pattern in which the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closed is controlled 16 times repeatedly in a 16R big hit gaming state (sometimes referred to as a 16R big hit gaming state that is opened for a short time). Then, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “8R probability variation big hit”, the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or after closing the opening / closing pattern to be closed when the lower great prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won in the lower big prize opening 2005, the lower big prize opening 2005 is shortened. Open / close pattern that is closed after opening for a time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is controlled to 8R jackpot gaming state that repeats 8 times (sometimes referred to as 8R jackpot gaming state that is open for a long time). When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). 16R big hit gaming state (simply open for a long time) that repeats the opening / closing pattern to be closed 16 times when the above-mentioned top prize winning hole sensor 2552 detects that nine game balls have been won at the top prize winning opening 2006. (Sometimes referred to as a 16R big hit gaming state). In addition, the lower big prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won after the lower big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) in the 4R big hit gaming state or at the lower big prize opening 2005. In this example, the opening / closing pattern (round) that is closed when closed is repeated 4 times, but after that, the lower closing prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then the opening / closing pattern that is closed is repeated 12 times. By substantially executing the control of the 4R big hit gaming state, the opening / closing pattern for controlling the opening / closing of the lower big prize opening 2005 is always repeated 16 times regardless of the type of the big hit when the big hit gaming state is reached. Yes, after 8 hours of winning the 8R big win game state, after opening the Shimodai prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or having 9 game balls won in the Shimodai prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern that is closed when it is detected by the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 is repeated eight times, and then the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the opening / closing pattern to be closed is not performed. You may do it. That is, as long as the number of repetitions of the round in which the game ball can be received at the lower prize winning opening 2005 substantially matches, the number of times is not limited to the above.

  In the present embodiment, a left-handed state in which a game based on a winning of a game ball mainly at the first starting port 2002 is executed, and a game based on a winning of a game ball mainly at the second starting port 2004 is executed. The right-handed state is controlled. Specifically, the right-handed state is controlled when the time-shortening control is being executed, while the left-handed state is controlled when the time-shortening control is not being executed. In a left-handed state, a long-open big hit game state of up to 8 rounds is executed, and in a right-handed state, a long-open big hit game state of up to 16 rounds is executed. Can get more prize balls than left-handed.

  In the big hit control process, after performing the opening control of such a large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006, lower large winning opening 2005), each set process of the high probability flag, the short time flag, and the short time counter is performed. Run. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used until the next big hit occurs after being used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 161 described later (the first shown in FIG. 166 described later). Special symbol stop process or second special symbol stop process (not shown)).

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and the big hit (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state) after the big hit gaming state ends ( 1R special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 166, which will be described later. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S38), and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S37), a second special symbol including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 2107 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value (upper limit). It is determined whether the value is “4” (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S43 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S41. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S42 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value (when a so-called “blurred ball” occurs), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S43 to step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S41). S45) By ending the processing, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2325 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S53 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S51. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S52 that the number of the second special symbol hold is the maximum value (when a so-called “blurred ball” occurs), the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S53 to step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S55) By ending the process, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command (first hold) that indicates the number of hold of the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) when the number of hold of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002 The number specifying command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board, and when the number of reserved special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the above storage process (step S20). ) Sets a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the number of hold of the second special symbol and transmits it to the peripheral control board. In addition, when a random number is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, a command (first blow ball designation command) for notifying the random number is also described above. It is set in the storage process, transmitted to the peripheral control board, and when a random number is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the random number is notified. A command to be performed (second play ball designation command) is also set by the above-described storage processing and transmitted to the peripheral control board. When the first and second ball commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board by the storage process, the stored contents of the first special symbol non-lottery storage area and the second special symbol non-lottery storage area are cleared.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. First special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number Normal processing (step S80)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )

  3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)

  4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83).

  5. The first special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 155).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs step S101. As a process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 is shown. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area.
As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that has occurred first). become.

And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed.
Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board is a big hit at the high probability shown in FIG. 162 (A). If a determination table is selected (step S112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 162 (A) is selected (step S113). The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-short time) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case of state and low probability short state) and jackpot judgment at high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability short state) And a table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and 399 types of first jackpot determination values. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the special random numbers are coincident with the loss determination value indicating that the special random numbers are out of place (a jackpot probability at a low probability; 1/400). In this example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the first special random number is used in the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. In the same manner as the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the jackpot determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won the jackpot, 399 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that it is (a big hit probability at a low probability; 1/400).

  Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value, and the 390 types of first special random numbers are lost determination values. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other (a jackpot probability at a high probability; 1/40). In this example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the first special random number is used in the high probability jackpot determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the jackpot determination value indicating that the ten types of second special random numbers have won the jackpot, 390 types of second special random numbers deviate from the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to be coincident with the loss judgment value indicating that (a big hit probability at a high probability; 1/40). Note that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referred to compare with the first special random number and the jackpot determination table referred to compare with the second special random number (the number of jackpot determination values is the same number). The jackpot judgment value may be different (the jackpot probability is common), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)) may be different. In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table may be made different (both may be made different).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board determines that the jackpot is determined as a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S115). Then, a big hit flag indicating that the change is won for the big hit is set (step S116), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step S115 that a loss occurs, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in a high probability non-short-time state, and when the gaming state is in a high-probability short-time state. Reach determination table used in the case of high probability short-time state, and reach determination table in low-probability state used when the gaming state is low-probability state (low probability non-short-time state and low probability short-time state), It has. In the reach determination table in the high probability short-time state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached matches with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, the reach determination table in the low probability state has one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short time state reach. Then, the reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 kinds of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased compared to the high probability time short state.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, 6 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the 66 reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach in the high probability non-short-time state is higher than that in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state (low-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state). Enhanced.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), and determines that the reach is out of place (step S120), the fluctuation is detected. A reach flag indicating reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU of the main control board firstly The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of one special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 162 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined by comparing with the symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (B), each symbol random number (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R right big big hit) The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are stored in association with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to a 4R big hit game state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then a low probability non-short state state (so-called normal state) until the next big hit game state occurs 4R normal big hit to control

  2. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to a 4R big hit game state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then controlled to a high probability non-short time state until the big hit game state occurs. 4R latent probability big hit that performs an effect that is difficult to determine that it is controlled to a probability state

  3. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state that can enter the lower big prize opening 2005 (easy), and then controlled to the high probability time short state until the big hit gaming state is generated.

  4). The game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit game state in which it is difficult to enter the lower major prize opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern that is closed after the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). 16R sudden big hit is executed to control to a high probability short-time state until a big hit gaming state occurs, and to suddenly shift to a high probability short-time state without occurrence of a big hit gaming state in the middle of the game

  5. Open / close to close when the lower major prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower major prize opening sensor 2354 detects that nine game balls have been won at the lower major prize opening 2005 After repeating the pattern eight times, the game ball can enter the lower major prize opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes after closing the lower major prize opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (easily) ) 8R big hit game state is controlled, and until the next big hit gaming state occurs, it is controlled to a short state with high probability.

  6). Opening / closing to be closed when the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when nine gaming balls are won in the upper prize winning opening 2006 by the upper prize winning opening sensor 2552. By repeating the pattern 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit gaming state in which the game ball can enter the upper prize winning opening 2006 (easy), and then controlled to a high probability time-short state until the big hit gaming state occurs.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second start door member 2323 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display, and the big hits related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R right big change) Big hit) will occur.
Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only the display is executed, and a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent positive hit, 4R positive change big hit, 16R positive change big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In addition, the jackpot related to the first special symbol can be repeatedly opened and closed eight times at the maximum lower prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), whereas it is related to the second special symbol. In the case of a big hit, the opening / closing pattern that opens the upper prize winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times, and the lower prize winning opening 2005 related to the first special symbol is opened for a long time ( For example, 28.5 seconds), the upper prize winning opening 2006 related to the second special symbol is opened for a longer time (for example, 28.5 seconds) than the ratio (31%) determined for the 8R probability variation big hit that repeats the opening / closing pattern of 8 times. In order to set the ratio (63%) determined for the 16R probability variation jackpot that repeats the opening / closing pattern 16 times to about twice, mainly based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 Technique it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls mainly compared to the left-handed state a player based on the winning of the game balls to the first start hole 2002 is executed in a right-handed state which is executed.

  When the 4R normal jackpot is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 4R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 4R latent probability jackpot is determined, the 4R latent jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. When the 4R probability variation big hit is decided, the 4R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, when the 16R sudden variation big hit is decided, the 16R sudden variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variable big hit is decided The 8R probability variable big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. Although not shown, when the 4R normal big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 4R normal big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined, the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. When the big hit symbol is determined, the 4R probability variable big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, the 4R probability variable big hit symbol is determined, and when the 16R probability variable big hit symbol is determined, the 16R probability variable big hit symbol is determined.

  In addition, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU of the main control board determines that the first special symbol is out of the way when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S136), and then counts the number of big hits. The counter is incremented by 1 (step S135b), and the process proceeds to step S137.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board instructs the lottery result (the type of jackpot, reach losing, or losing as the processing of step S137 (first A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that a special symbol stop pattern mode may be transmitted to the peripheral control board. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left decoration, the left decoration, and the left decoration are displayed in a variable manner). Stop display in the order of symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol (Note that the left, middle and right decorative symbols may be variably displayed in synchronization with the same symbol and may be stopped at the same time). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU specifies 4R normal big hit out of big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are stopped. Is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot symbol (the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols from “0” to “9” being the same even symbol), and the 4R latent big jackpot is specified among the big jackpots Is determined to be a 4R latency big hit symbol (a combination of the same left and middle decorative symbols of “0” to “9”, which is the same even symbol as the 4R normal big hit symbol). If 4R probability variation big hit is specified, 4R probability variation big hit symbol is determined (combination where the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all “1” or “9”), and 16R sudden big hit is identified among the big hits 16R sudden hit big hit When the design (the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs including all the designs of “1”, “3”, and “5”) is determined, and 8R probability variation big hit is specified among the big hits, 8R probability variation big hit When the symbol (the combination where the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all “5”) is determined, and the 16R probable big hit is specified among the big wins, the 16R probable big hit symbol (the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all The combination is “7”. In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols having the same left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” but having a different middle decorative design; reach lose If it is determined to be a symbol, and it is determined that it is out of place, it is determined to be a symbol that does not have reach (a combination of at least the left, right, and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU of the main control board has the big hit flag set. If so (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the type of big hit determined at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If so (step S145), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal deviation (reach effect). If it is an error that does not execute, select a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of error. (Step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol display is subjected to variable display control by the first special symbol display for the variation time determined in this manner, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 performs effect control in synchronization with the variable symbol variable display. Will be done.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, 164 kinds of random numbers among 241 kinds of random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 kinds of random numbers are super reach with a low expectation degree of jackpot Determination values (223 to 240) are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are to execute any one of the super reach effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot. ) Is set. Super-reach production has a higher jackpot expectation than normal reach production, and when a player who wants to generate a big hit gaming state has a player's expectation for the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. It is getting higher.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-short-time state and the short-time state. 12 seconds variation time is set. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 0.3 seconds is set as the short time state. Is set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time-short state. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short-time state and in the non-short-time state, prompting the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004 during the short-time state, and the player starting the second time A time for winning a game ball in the mouth 2004 is secured.

  Further, as described above, in the right-handed state, only an interval through which one game ball can pass is provided to restrict the rolling of the game ball, and guide to the gate unit 2003 and the second start port 2004 with a very high probability. Is done. That is, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability, and the normal symbol is a hit, and the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is advanced. Then, the game balls are configured to be received at the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability (substantially all of the game balls that have been thrown to the right side of the center accessory 2500). In the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to be about 100%. When the normal symbol is hit, the second start port door member 2323 of the second start port 2004 is set for a long period (5.5 in this example). For 2 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. In this example, when the player operates the handle lever 504, game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Then, when the launched game ball is driven to the right side of the center object 2500, the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004 with a very high probability, and therefore the second start port door of the second start port 2004 in a short time state. In a state in which the member 2323 moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004, a game ball wins in the second start port 2004 occurs at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. In this example, as described above, in the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the very short variation time is set to 0.3 seconds. . Further, the interval time from when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped to when the variable display is started again is set to about 0.6 seconds. That is, in the short time state, the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is extremely shortened compared to the non-short time state (variation time 12 seconds, interval time 0.6 seconds), and the game ball to the second start port 2004 is reduced. Since the difference between the winning interval and the execution interval of the variation display of the second special symbol is narrowed in the short time state, even if a large amount of game balls win the second starting port 2004 in a very short time, The variable display is executed in a very short time to prevent the number of second special symbols from being retained, and in the short time state, the number of variable displays per unit time is extremely increased compared to the non-short time state. This makes it possible to win the next big hit in a very short time compared to the previous gaming machine in the high probability short-time state that is controlled to shift to the right-handed state, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time , Can improve the game entertainment.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs step S171. As a process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs step S181. As a process, display control for causing the first special symbol display to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 receives the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board (step S182).

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of time (time for performing display or the like to start the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, The time reduction flag is reset (step S189), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S194), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit start command, 4R latent big hit per 4R normal big hit, 4R positive big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R sudden big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit) Start command, 4R probability variation jackpot start command, 16R sudden variation jackpot start command, 8R probability variation jackpot start command, 16R probability variation jackpot start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 167, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0).
In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the center is based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by setting in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) is received. A control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3060 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

[8. Battle production]
Next, the winning time shortening control, which is a main part of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. 169 and FIG. 173 show that the above command analysis shows that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out of reach, per reach) is received when the high probability time-short state is controlled. FIG. 171 to FIG. 173 are timing charts of battle effects executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when specified in the process (step S601). FIG. 171 to FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the battle effect performed with the center liquid crystal display device 1500, when it is specified by the said command analysis process (step S601) that the determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command which show that become are received. is there.

  In this example, during the high-probability time-short state, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays a manner in which the main character 1500a walks, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced in the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. To display the fluctuation. When the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating reach are received, the enemy character 1500b is displayed so as to confront the main character 1500a, and the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are confronted. Perform battle production. And when the received determination result notification command shows a big hit, as a result of the battle effect, the mode in which the main character 1500a wins the enemy character 1500b is displayed, and when the received determination result notification command shows a loss, A mode in which the main character 1500a is defeated by the enemy character 1500b as a result of the battle effect is displayed.

Further, in the battle effect, after the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to face each other, they are blacked out once (displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by turning off the screen). Then, one of the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b is displayed. It is shown that a first strike is made by the character displayed after this blackout, and if the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout, it will be a big hit.
On the other hand, when the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout, if the attack of the enemy character 1500b is avoided, it will be a big hit. As described above, the player can recognize that the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout, and that the player can recognize that it is a big hit. Even when the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout, the player can avoid the attack of the enemy character 1500b. It becomes possible to recognize that it is a big hit.

  In this way, even if it is determined that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle production, if the battle production is continued and the variable display is executed for a long time, the special symbol per unit time will be displayed. Since the number of times of variable display is reduced, the number of wins of the big hit gaming state and the expected value of winning balls can be reduced, which may give a disadvantage to the player and lower the gaming interest. In this example, when it is determined that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle performance, the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) is controlled to be opened at that time to control the big hit gaming state While starting, the direction of the battle is continued to be executed to the end. Details will be described below.

  In this example, battle production short and battle production long are provided as fluctuation patterns when reaching reach during a high probability short-time state, battle production short is executed only when it is a big hit, battle production long is a big hit This is executed both in the case where it becomes and the case where it becomes out of place. First, the battle effect executed based on the battle effect short fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 171 (A) to 172 (I). In the high-probability short-time state, a game in which a right ball is made to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays that effect (right stroke →). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability short-time state, the peripheral control MPU displays the manner in which the main character 1500a is moving on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In this state, when the second special symbol process (step S39) is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2004, the main control MPU performs the second special symbol as shown in FIG. The display of the second special symbol is started on the display, and a judgment result notification command and a fluctuation pattern command (in this case, a judgment result notification command indicating a big hit and a battle effect short fluctuation pattern are displayed on the peripheral control board. Is transmitted). When the determination result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command are received from the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and receives the received fluctuation. When the variation time designated by the pattern command has elapsed, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the reach result is indicated by the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU (reach is out of reach, reach is a big hit), the main character 1500a stops to something. The noticed mode is displayed (FIG. 171 (B)).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU displays the enemy character 1500b on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to confront the main character 1500a (FIG. 171 (C)), and then blacks out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 ( FIG. 171 (D)). Then, the received judgment result notification command indicates that it is a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) that continues the high probability time-short state, and instructs the execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect short by the variation pattern command. If this is the case, the peripheral control MPU gradually brightens the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so that only the main character 1500a appears, and the left, middle, and right of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner (hit-hit symbol), and a “hit-win!” Message is displayed to notify the player that a big-hit will be achieved (FIG. 171 (E)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, the variation time of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is substantially the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing in the middle of the battle effect that only the main character 1500a emerges after blacking out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, The main control MPU starts opening control of the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) based on the fact that the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the main control MPU starts the opening control of the big winning opening (the upper winning opening 2006 or the lower winning opening 2005), the peripheral control MPU displays “big win!” To control the big win gaming state. The player can recognize that the control of the jackpot gaming state is started, and the player suffers a disadvantage without noticing that the control of the jackpot gaming state is started. Can be suppressed. Note that the player is not limited to the above example as long as the player can surely recognize that the control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the sound output of the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. (the big hit is started. Or a display notifying that the big hit is started (starting the big hit) may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control MPU continues to execute the battle effect even after the control of the big hit gaming state is started by the main control MPU, and displays a mode in which the main character 1500a attacks the enemy character 1500b. (FIG. 172 (F)). Next, the peripheral control MPU displays “Press the button to stab the stop!” On the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and starts the timer to start measuring the effective period (FIG. 172 (G)). When the dish effect button 257 is operated and the detection signal from the effect button pressing sensor 258 is input to the peripheral control MPU, the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is unrecognizable from the player side by the elevating unit 3510. From the position (rising end position), it slides downward in an arc shape and moves to the appearance position (falling end position) that is visible from the player side, and the rotating connecting member 3630 is rotated to rotate the back four corners second decorative body The back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the base 3631 and the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 is rotated (rotated) (FIG. 172 (H)).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU displays the winning mode of the main character 1500a (FIG. 172 (I)), and then executes a jackpot gaming state effect display (a jackpot effect; a round effect display, etc.) as shown in FIG. . Thus, even if the big hit gaming state is started before the effect of the battle effect short is completed, the peripheral control MPU continues to execute the effect of the battle effect short and responds to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. Then, the rear decoration unit 3550 appears to advance in the direction in which the battle effect short effect is completed (FIG. 172 (H)). In other words, when the battle effect is executed, the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 to cause the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 to appear in order to complete the effect of the battle effect short. In this way, since the effect of the battle effect short can be completed according to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect, and satisfaction and achievement can be obtained, A more attractive performance than conventional gaming machines can be executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 is continued until one round of the big hit gaming state is completed, but the upper plate effect button 257 is not operated within the effective period. However, the back-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 may be exposed after the expiration of the effective period. If the upper plate effect button 257 is not operated within the effective period, the back-bottom post-rotation decoration body You may make it display the aspect which the main character 1500a won, without making unit 3550 express.

  Also, in this example, the player is notified that the game will be a big hit in the middle of the battle production, and the control of the big hit gaming state is started. In this way, the start time of the big hit gaming state that would otherwise be started after executing all of the battle effects is advanced, and the variation time of the battle presentation that is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is shortened. The reduction in the number of special symbol variations is suppressed. Specifically, in this example, a period of 58 seconds to 87 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257) is set as a period required to execute all effects of the battle effect short. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is 12 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect short is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 12 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and the control of the big hit gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect short (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be half or more of the whole period) are executed during the jackpot gaming state, The effect period of the battle effect short executed before the control is 12 seconds, whereas the effect period of the battle effect short executed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 It depends on.

  As described above, the period executed during the jackpot gaming state (period executed as the jackpot effect) among all the period required for execution of the battle effect short is the period (fluctuation time) executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state. ) To reduce the time required for variable display, and it is possible to suppress the reduction in the number of times of variable display of special symbols per unit time. As described above, in the big hit gaming state, after the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005) is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or below) An open / close pattern (round) that is closed when the game player has detected nine game balls in the big prize opening 2005) is detected a plurality of times (in this example, four rounds). Therefore, a period of a certain period or more is necessarily required from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end thereof. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 synchronizes with the variable display effect (special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol)) in a variable display effect before the start of the big hit gaming state. And the remaining effect is executed as a jackpot effect after the start of the jackpot game state, and the battle effect short effect period that is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the jackpot game state is The variation time of the battle effect short is set so as to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect short executed as the jackpot effect after the start of the big hit gaming state. As a result, for the player, the battle lever 504 is operated, and the battle is executed during the execution period of the big hit gaming state in which only the game ball is won in the big winning opening (the upper winning hole 2006 or the lower winning hole 2005). Executing a part of the production of the production short and performing the production of the production of the short game without ending before the start of the big hit gaming state. Since the variation time of the battle production short can be shortened by 46 to 75 seconds compared with the case where the second special symbol is displayed during the variation display, the variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started. It is possible to shorten the period until the big hit gaming state is finished, and the variation time of special symbols per unit time is reduced by reducing the variation time. There for possible to prevent the reduction may increase the execution opportunities jackpot determination process. In addition, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle content is not simplified. It is possible to reduce the variation time by executing the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the simplification of the production content.

  Further, in the above-described example, an effect (button effect) that requires a button operation is executed after it has been determined that a big hit is achieved, and the back and bottom rear rotation decoration is performed based on the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 within the effective period. The body unit 3550 is moved from a retracted position that cannot be viewed from the player side to an appearing position where the body unit 3550 can be viewed. In other words, the player notifies the player that the big hit has been confirmed, and if the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 within the valid period, the player will preliminarily indicate that the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears. Button production is executed in the state of grasping. Normally, the button effect is executed before the result of the variable display is confirmed, and if the result of the variable display is off, the back effect is rotated even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period. When the possibility that the decorative body unit 3550 will appear from the retracted position to the appearance position is set low, and the result of the variable display is a big hit, the back is displayed when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period. The lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is set to have a higher possibility of appearing from the retracted position to the appearance position.

  In addition, as described above, the jackpot probability at the low probability is set to 1/400, and the jackpot probability at the high probability is set to 1/40. Therefore, when the button effect is executed, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, the possibility that the back / bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position is low. In this way, when the button effect is executed, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, if the back / bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 does not appear at the appearance position from the retracted position, the player feels stress, Further, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, there is a low possibility that the back / bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 will appear from the retreat position to the appearance position, so there is a possibility that the game entertainment will be lowered when the button effect is executed. It was.

  In this example, when the button effect is executed after the big hit is determined as described above and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is always moved from the retracted position. In order to execute the button effect in a state where the player knows in advance that it will appear at the appearance position, the upper plate effect to dissipate the stress accumulated by the button effect that was executed before it was decided that it would be a big hit The button 257 can be operated. In addition, since it is determined that a big hit has been made, it is possible to cause the back and bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 to appear by operating the upper plate effect button 257 while attracting attention from surrounding players, so that a sense of superiority is obtained. Can increase the joy of having a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170 and FIG. 171 (A) to FIG. 171 (D), FIG. 171 (E ′), FIG. 172, and FIG. 173 regarding the battle effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long. explain. In addition, since the effect performed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long includes the same effect as the effect performed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect short, the battle effect short for overlapping portions. Will be read as battle production long, and only the parts different from the battle production short production will be described below.

  171 (A) to 171 (D) by the peripheral control MPU based on the reception of the determination result command and the variation pattern command (in this case, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the battle effect long) from the main control MPU. After executing the above, when only the enemy character 1500b emerges by gradually brightening the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (FIG. 171 (E ′)), an attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed. As shown in FIG. 170, the attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed while the second special symbol is being displayed.

  The received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) that continues the high-probability time-short state, and the execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect long is instructed by the variation pattern command. In this case, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ′)), and the left and middle displayed in a reduced size in the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner (hit-hit symbol) and the message “Attack avoidance! Big-hit confirmed!” Is displayed to notify the player that a big hit will be made (FIG. 173 (G ′)). Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I) are executed. As shown in FIG. 170, the variation time of the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is almost the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing in the middle of the battle effect that the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b, and the big special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the stop display, the main control MPU starts the opening control of the big prize opening (upper big prize opening 2006 or lower big prize opening 2005).

  On the other hand, the received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probable big hit) that ends the failure or high-probability short-time state, and executes the variation pattern of the battle effect long by the variation pattern command. Is displayed, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a receives the attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ″)), and if the received determination result notification command is out of place. The left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the lower left part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are stopped and displayed in an off mode (in this case, out of reach symbols), and the received judgment result notification command is in a high-probability time-short state. If the big hit is to end (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit), the lower left corner of the central liquid crystal display 1500 Displaying the reduced left, middle, and right decorative symbols in a big-hit manner and displaying "defeat ..." informs the player that the shift or the high probability short-time state will end (Fig. 173 (G ″)). After that, if the received determination result notification command is out of order, the process returns to FIG. 171 (A) to display the manner in which the main character 1500a is moving on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. If the big hit to end the state (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit), the fact that the big hit gaming state is started and control of the big hit gaming state is executed, then returning to FIG. A mode in which the character 1500 a is moving is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  It should be noted that a period of 78 seconds to 107 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257) is set as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long executed in the case of a big hit. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit gaming state is 32 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect long is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 32 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and control of the big hit gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect long (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be half or more of the whole period) are executed during the jackpot gaming state, The battle effect long effect period executed before the control is 32 seconds, while the battle effect long effect period executed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257). It depends on.

  As described above, even when a battle effect having a longer effect period than the battle effect short is executed, the period executed during the jackpot gaming state among all the effect periods required for executing the battle effect long (executed as a jackpot effect) The time required for variable display is reduced by making the period of time) longer than the period (variable time) executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, and the number of times of special symbol variable display per unit time is reduced. Can be deterred. That is, some of the effects of the battle effect long are displayed before the start of the big hit gaming state. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is synchronized with the variable display effect (special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol)). And the remaining effect is executed as a jackpot effect after the start of the jackpot game state, and the battle effect long effect period that is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the jackpot game state is The variation time of the battle effect long is set so as to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect long executed as the jackpot effect after the start of the big hit game state. As a result, for the player, the battle lever 504 is operated, and the battle is executed during the execution period of the big hit gaming state in which only the game ball is won in the big winning opening (the upper winning hole 2006 or the lower winning hole 2005). The second special symbol changes as a variable display effect while all the effects of the battle effect long are executed to the end without executing all the effects of the battle effect long. Compared to the case where it is executed during the display, the battle effect long change time is shortened by 46 to 75 seconds, and the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started to be changed and then the big hit gaming state is ended. It is possible to shorten the period until the time is reached, and because the fluctuation time is shortened, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the number of fluctuation display times of special symbols per unit time. It can increase the sense of execution opportunities. In addition, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle content is not simplified. It is possible to reduce the variation time by executing the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the simplification of the production content.

  In addition, 65 seconds is required as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long that is executed when it becomes a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) that ends the off-state or high probability short-time state. Is set. In other words, the variation time of the battle effect long that is executed in the case of a big hit (in this example, a 4R normal big hit, a 4R latent big hit) that ends the loss or high probability short-time state is set to 65 seconds. In addition, after executing the battle effect long and displaying the mode that the main character 1500a receives without being able to avoid the attack of the enemy character 1500b, the main character 1500a is revived and the effect of defeating the enemy character 1500b is executed. In this case, when the main character 1500a is restored, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and the jackpot symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Then, after starting the control of the big hit gaming state, an effect of defeating the enemy character 1500b (for example, the effects of FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I)) may be executed. In this case, the period of the effect executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state may be longer than the period of the effect performed during the jackpot gaming state. Since the production period can be shortened compared to the case where the production is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the number of times of display of the special symbol per unit time.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  In the above example, what is performed during the high probability short-time state is shown, but the effect period is shortened as compared with the case where all the effects executed in relation to the variable display are executed before the start of the big hit gaming state. As long as the control is executed, it is not limited to the high-probability time-short state, but the low-probability non-time-short state (so-called normal state), the low-probability time-short state (so-called time-short state), the high-probability non-time-short state, and the high-probability time-short state. It may be executed in any one of (so-called probability variation states) or in any combination (or all). In addition, when the control for shortening the effect period is executed even in a case other than the high-probability short-time state, the appearance frequency and jackpot expectation degree of the effect may be varied for each gaming state. For example, in the non-time-short state (high probability non-time-short state, low-probability non-time-short state), the appearance frequency is lower than the time-short state (high-probability time-short state, low-probability time-short state), and the jackpot expectation is lower than the time-short state. In the case of a big hit, you can increase the selection ratio of the long version (battle production long) of the battle production in the non-time-short state, and increase the selection ratio of the short version (battle production short) of the battle production in the time-short state In the short-time state, the effect of shortening the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) to the end of the big hit gaming state may be enhanced as compared to the non-time-short state.

  In addition, as described above, in the variation pattern that is a big hit that continues the high probability short-time state between the battle production short and the battle production long, the button production is executed during the big hit gaming state, but at the operation timing of the upper plate production button 257 Accordingly, the effect contents of the jackpot effect executed after the battle effect is ended may be varied. For example, when the button effect is executed, the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 is set until a predetermined round (for example, 3 rounds) in the big hit gaming state ends, and the upper round is increased (for example, until 2 rounds are completed). When the dish effect button 257 is operated, a series of jackpot effects (video, etc.) that are completed before the remaining rounds in the jackpot game state are executed, and the upper dish effect is performed in a late round (for example, three rounds). When the button 257 is operated, a series of jackpot effects may be ended halfway when the remaining rounds in the jackpot gaming state are performed while performing the same effects. As described above, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is late, the big hit effect ends in the middle, and therefore the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at an early timing.

  In addition, while executing the common jackpot effect regardless of the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 as described above, it is executed until the big hit effect is completed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 or is terminated halfway. However, it is possible to execute different effects according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is early, On the other hand, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is late, the upper plate effect button 257 is operated at an early timing by displaying an effect that makes the player uncomfortable. The timing when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated (round, elapsed time, before operating the upper plate effect button 257 It is executed as a big hit effect by changing the type of the big hit effect that is executed after the end of the battle effect according to the winning opening (the number of game balls that have entered the upper big prize port 2006 or the lower big prize port 2005). The battle effect may be completed by operating the upper plate effect button 257 at the timing determined by the player himself while considering the type of the game. Thus, by changing the subsequent development according to the timing when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, the player can think about the timing when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated and enjoy the game in the big hit game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect more attractive than the big hit effect that is executed in the conventional big hit game state.

  Further, the mode of the battle effect may be changed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 (round, elapsed time, until the upper plate effect button 257 is operated) The effect display (for example, the back side) is displayed when the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears earlier or later as the number of game balls that have entered the top prize opening (the top university prize opening 2006 or the bottom university prize opening 2005) is earlier or later. When displaying a flame around the lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the size and color of the flame may be flashy. As the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is earlier, the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at an earlier timing by making the effect display when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears more flashy. The slower the operation timing of the button 257, the more the effect display when the behind-the-bottom post-rotation decorative body unit 3550 is made to appear makes it possible to operate the upper plate effect button 257 at a later timing. Thus, by appropriately setting the effects, it is possible to guide the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, as the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (the upper large winning port 2006 or the lower large winning port 2005) before the upper plate directing button 257 is operated is changed. If the direction of the performance (one or both of the battle effect and the jackpot effect) is different, the big prize opening (upper prize) will be given in all the jackpot gaming states that have been executed since the start of the high probability short-time control. It may be changed according to the number of game balls that have entered the mouth 2006 or the lower prize opening 2005). In this case, since the aspect of the effect can be varied as the number of jackpot game states executed in the high probability short-time state increases, the player can be controlled according to the effect mode executed according to the number of jackpot game states. Can give a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

  Further, in the above example, when the button effect is executed and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the effective period ends at that time, and the back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is moved a predetermined number of times (this (In the example, it is configured to appear only once). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the back-bottom-rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears, the valid period is not ended. By operating the upper plate effect button 257 again after the rotating decorative body unit 3550 is retracted, the back and lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be caused to appear, or a predetermined round (all rounds in the big hit gaming state) Or if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated in a specific round (for example, until the end of the 10th round or an odd number of rounds), the back and bottom rotation decoration The unit 3550 may be caused to appear, thereby further enhancing the joy of being a big hit, and the big hit by the appearance of the back and bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 by the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. You can appeal to others and give you a sense of superiority.

  Further, in the above example, the structure is such that a battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect long) can be executed not only in the case of a big hit, but also in the case of a loss, but it becomes a big hit during a high-probability time-short state. It is assumed that the variation pattern of the battle effect can be executed only in the case, and the battle effect may not be executed in the case of a deviation. By configuring in this way, when a battle effect is executed, it is always a big hit, so it is possible to pay attention to the effect with a margin and the timing at which the control of the big hit gaming state is started and the type of big hit (4R normal) The big hit, the 4R latent big hit, the 4R positive change big hit, and the 16R positive change big hit) can be noted.

  In addition, a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) that ends the high-probability short-time state is instructed by the determination result notification command during the high-probability short-time state, and a battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect) by the variation pattern command When the variation pattern of “Long” is instructed, the control of the big hit gaming state is started after the end of the battle effect, but the 4R big hit gaming state executed in this case is compared with the 16R big hit gaming state. Since the period required from the start to the end of the big hit gaming state is short, even if the battle effect is executed as a variable display effect until the end, the special symbol (this In this case, the special symbol (in this case) is compared with the period from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to the end of the 16 jackpot gaming state. It can shorten the period until the end of the 4 jackpot gaming state from the start of variable display of the second special symbol).

[9. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board in which the front structural member and the front unit are cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 175 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and FIG. 175 (b) is a sectional view showing only the main part by cutting along the line H-H in FIG. It is. Further, FIG. 176 is an explanatory view showing the vicinity of the top prize winning opening in FIG. 174 in an enlarged manner.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side on the upper side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 that divides the game area 5a into left and right depending on the strength of the game.
It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the game ball can be driven stronger as it is rotated in the clockwise direction.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the ball launcher 680 hits the game ball with a driving strength less than a predetermined driving strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, Of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, it enters the left side of the front view from the highest part. Then, the game ball that has entered the left side of the outermost peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the center accessory 2500 while the game ball abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). Will flow down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball passes through the warp passage 2521 and It is supplied to the left end of the stage 2530 from a warp outlet 2522 that opens in the frame.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 roll back and forth on the stage 2530 and come and go side by side guide grooves 2532 formed on both sides of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. When it is released from the front, the area above the start-up unit 2100 flows down below the stage 2530 in the game area 5a. Thereby, a game ball may be received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released forward from the central guide groove 2531 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5 a of the stage 2530, the start port unit 2100 that opens directly below the central guide groove 2531. The first starting port 2002 is accepted with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, a game is played below the center accessory 2500 by a plurality of obstacle nails, the first shelf 2201a of the side unit 2200, and the like. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the center in the left-right direction in the region 5a and received by the general winning port 2001, the first start port 2002, etc. arranged on the downstream side. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

Also, the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not flow down to the attacker unit 2300 side due to the lower side of the center accessory 2500 extending between the start port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300. It will not be accepted into the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, the lower large winning port 2005, etc. of the attacker unit 2300.
The starting port unit 2100 is provided with a horizontally-rectangular fake portion 2105a that is similar to the lower large winning port door member 2352 that opens and closes the lower large winning port 2005 in the attacker unit 2300, below the first starting port 2002. Therefore, it is possible to make an illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening as in a conventional pachinko machine.

  On the other hand, the ball launcher 680 is driven with a driving strength not less than a predetermined driving strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, so that it is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The game ball enters (is struck) to the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. Then, the game ball that has entered to the right side of the highest peripheral portion of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 passes through the upper game space 2541 and the right passage 2542 from the upper right entrance to the lower right exit 2543. It is discharged directly above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300. As a result, a game ball that has been thrown down (right-handed) so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability. Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down to the shelf member 2303 through the front of the second start port 2004, rolls left on the shelf member 2303 in the front view, and then the front of the shelf member 2303. It is emitted downward from the left end of the view. The game ball released from the shelf member 2303 flows down the lower right rail 1005 through the front of the lower large prize opening 2005, rolls on the lower right rail 1005 to the left in the front view, and plays from the out port 1111. It is discharged out of the area 5a.

  When the game ball released from the lower right exit 2543 flows down the left side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, the second start port 2004 is provided via the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the guide portion 2302b of the start port front member 2302. Or, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the Shimodai prize opening 2005. On the other hand, when a game ball flows down on the right side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, it flows down onto the lower right rail 1005 and is discharged from the out port 1111 without being received by the general prize opening 2001, the second starting port 2004, or the like. The

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate part 2003 when the lower major prize opening 2005 is open, it is accepted into the lower major prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

  When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2305, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board. Advances for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 3 seconds) to open the second start port 2004. Accordingly, when the game ball reaches the front of the second start port 2004 at the timing when the second start port door member 2323 is moved forward and opened, the second start port door member 2323 changes the flow direction to the rear. And will be received by the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 1 to 10 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5.

  In addition, if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “winning”, “small hit”, “per probability variation”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the player draws a special lottery result that has been drawn out to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “ There are “per probability change (probability change)”, “per time reduction (time reduction)”, “short per probability change time”, “no per short time change probability”, and so on.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state Any one of the lower prize opening door member 2352 of the attacker unit 2300 or the upper prize opening door member 2550 of the center accessory 2500 opens and closes in an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the lottery special lottery result. A game ball can be received at the winning prize opening 2005 or the upper university winning prize opening 2006. When a game ball is received in the lower university winning opening 2005 or the upper university winning opening 2006 when the lower university winning opening 2005 or the upper university winning opening 2006 is in an open state, a predetermined number of pieces are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout board. (For example, 10 or 13) game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the lower prize winning door member 2352 or the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, the lower prize winning opening 2005 or the upper prize winning opening 2006 accepts a game ball. The game ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the lower large prize opening door member 2352 or the upper large prize opening door member 2550 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes in a state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the lower big prize opening door member 2352 or the upper big prize opening door member 2550 is opened, or If any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the big prize opening 2005 or the upper big prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the lower big prize opening door member 2352 or the upper big prize opening door member 2550 is satisfied. An opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that is closed is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, the “2R big hit” is repeated for two rounds, and the “15R big hit” is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

[Reserved memory for accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004]
In the present embodiment, random numbers are acquired to execute a special lottery by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and variation display based on the acquired random number values is started. In the meantime, if a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the change cannot be started, so the random number value is held until the previously executed change display is completed. . The number of reserved random numbers to be held is limited to up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for those exceeding that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is received in the mouth 2004, it is discarded without acquiring a random value.

[Send hold number specification command to peripheral control board]
As described above, the main control MPU changes the number of first special symbols on hold based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, that is, the first start port shown in FIG. When the value of the first special reserved number counter in step S43 of the passing process is incremented by 1 and when the first special symbol reserved memory is digested, that is, in the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG. When the value of the first special reservation number counter in step S103 is decremented by 1, in the storage process (step S20) of FIG. 155 (b), a command (first reservation number designation command) that indicates the number of reservations of the first special symbol 0-4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board.

  Further, when the number of the second special symbol held changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, that is, when 1 is added in step S53 of FIG. 158, and the second special symbol is held. When one memory is digested, that is, in the second special symbol normal processing which is not shown and described because it is the same algorithm as the first special symbol normal processing, the value of the second special pending number counter is decremented by one. In this case, in the storage process (step S20), a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the hold number of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board.

[Reception of commands at the peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU controls the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on the command received from the main control board in the 16 ms steady process (see FIG. 167). Execute the process.

[Command analysis processing]
That is, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606 shown as an example of the 16 ms steady process of FIG. 168 every 16 ms. For example, in the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed.

[Production control processing]
In addition, in the effect control process in step S602, based on the analysis result of the command, as an example, as the process in step S137, the lottery result (a type of jackpot, reach losing, or losing is indicated (stop of the first special symbol) A design pattern notification process command or a variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process) may be transmitted in accordance with each lottery result so that the pattern form may be transmitted to the peripheral control board. A control process related to the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in step S149, the second variation pattern setting process).

  The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle Stop display in the order of the decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be synchronized and displayed in the same symbol, and may be stopped and displayed simultaneously).

  Furthermore, also in the case where it is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) that the first hold number designation commands 0 to 4 and the second hold number designation commands 0 to 4 are received, in the effect control process in step S602, In the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a control process for displaying the first reserved number related to the first special symbol and the second reserved number related to the second special symbol is executed.

[Display of decorative design in central liquid crystal display device 1500]
Next, an example regarding a display mode in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described.
FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 according to the embodiment. Here, an example of the display mode of the reserved memory during the progress of the effect of one variation of the decorative symbol drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by the player sitting directly facing the gaming machine 1 will be described. .

  Note that “1 variation” means that a first special symbol display (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 shown in the front view of the game board 5 in FIG. The first special lottery result selected by lottery is changed from the start of the change to the first special symbol until the stop display is performed, or the second special symbol display (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 goes to the second start port 2004. Until the second special lottery result lottered by accepting the game balls is started as a second special symbol and stopped and displayed, and the effect drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is also the first special symbol or It is done in accordance with the time when the second special symbol is displayed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present example, in the normal gaming state, that is, in the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second start port door member 2323 is driven. I will not. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs. However, except for the case where there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, only the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is executed, and the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit per the first special symbol) is executed. 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden variation big hit, and 8R certainty big hit). For this reason, hereinafter, the case where there is a reserved storage of the first special symbol will be mainly described.

  The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board based on the command from the main control board. ), At the upper part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the left side, the decorative symbol 1600b on the center, and the decorative symbol 1600c on the right side are started. Later, the variation display of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c is stopped, and the player can recognize the first special lottery result (winning determination result).

  In FIG. 177 (A), as an example of the decorative pattern being fluctuated, the left decorative symbol 1600a and the right decorative symbol 1600c are stopped and displayed at the same symbol on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and only the middle decorative symbol 1600b is changed. An example is shown in which the reach state is generated by a decorative design by adopting the display mode. In FIG. 177 (A), as an example, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as the symbol “7”, and only the middle decorative symbol 1600b is changed.

[Display of reserved memory in central liquid crystal display device 1500]
As shown in FIG. 177 (A), a first reserved number display area 1510 (first start port) related to the first special symbol is displayed on the lower left side of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 that can be visually recognized by the player. 2002) is set, and a second reserved number display area 1580 (related to the second start port 2004) related to the second special symbol is set on the lower right side of the display panel.

  In FIG. 177 (A), in the first hold number display area 1510, two hold images 1521 and 1522 indicating that the first special symbol is held in correspondence with the number of holds in the lottery result are displayed. It is indicated that the first number of holds of the lottery result for the special symbol is “2”. In addition, in the second number-of-holds display area 1580, the hold image indicating that the second special symbol is held in correspondence with the second number of holds of the lottery result is not displayed, and the lottery is drawn for the second special symbol. It is shown that there are no pending results.

  In addition, the display of the 1st reservation number in the 1st reservation number display area 1510 about the 1st special symbol is the 1st reservation memory, the 2nd reservation memory, the 3rd reservation memory from the left toward the center. The hold images 1521 to 1524 are displayed as in the fourth hold storage. In addition, the second hold number in the second hold number display area 1580 for the second special symbol is displayed in the first hold memory, the second hold memory, the third hold from the center toward the right. The hold image is displayed like the hold storage and the fourth hold storage.

  Moreover, in this example, the hold images 1521 to 1524 representing the hold storage can take a plurality of types of display modes. For example, a plurality of types of display modes may be used, in which the image shape is the same and the display color is different, the image display color is the same and the shape is different, and both the image shape and the display color are different. obtain.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved images 1521 to 1524 indicating that the first special symbols are reserved and stored are displayed in a circular shape, and the display colors of the reserved images 1521 to 1524 are changed to a plurality of colors. To do.

  In FIG. 177 (A), the reserved image 1521 and the reserved image 1522 for the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory for the first special symbol are displayed in the normal display mode of the reserved memory, for example, in a circular shape. It is displayed in “blue” (first reserved image) and is visible to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 177 (B), the middle decoration symbol 1600b that is being changed is displayed in accordance with the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board is specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601. "5" is stopped and displayed. As a result, the left decorative symbol is "7", the middle decorative symbol is "5" and the right decorative symbol is "7", and the decorative symbol variation stop result is "reach off" "Indicates that the player has been notified.

  Next, in FIG. 177 (C), the peripheral control MPU specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601. In the display panel of the display device 1500, it is shown that the symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c has started. Hereinafter, this is called digestion of reserved memory.

  The peripheral control MPU specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, the left decorative design is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c are started.

  Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board is received in the command analysis process (step S601), and in response to this, The first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the second special memory for the first special symbol in FIG. The displayed hold image 1522 is moved and displayed as the hold image 1521 (circular and display color “blue”) as the new first hold memory, and the first hold number of the lottery result is displayed for the first special symbol. “1”.

[Hold change effect]
FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In FIG. 178 (A), it is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board is received during the variation of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c. Thereafter, the fact that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board has been received is analyzed by the command analysis processing (step S601).

  In response to this, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in FIG. 178 (A), a second second hold is newly added to the right side of the hold image 1521 displayed as the first hold memory for the first special symbol. The stored image 1522 (circular and display color “blue”) is displayed as memory, and the third reserved memory is newly stored on the right side of the stored image 1522 displayed as the second reserved memory. An image 1523 (circular and display color “blue”) is displayed, which indicates that the first reserved number of lottery results for the first special symbol is “3”.

  Next, in FIG. 178 (B), it is analyzed by command analysis processing (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is received during the variation of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c. In response to this, for the first special symbol, the reserved image 1524 (circular display color is newly displayed on the right side of the reserved image 1523 displayed as the third reserved memory on the right side. “Blue”) is displayed, indicating that the first number of holds of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “4”, and that the number of reserved memories for the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. In the following description, the first hold number display area 1510 is simply referred to as the hold number display area 1510.

[Holding change effect using the upper plate effect button 257 and the hold image representing the hold memory]
In a conventional gaming machine configured to perform a hold notice effect, the probability of a big hit is kept low in a normal gaming state and the probability of reaching is not so high. For this reason, the player had a low chance to see the hold notice effect. In other words, it can be said that there is a low probability that the hold notice effect will be performed.

  In addition, there is a case where a hold notice is made on condition that the operation button is operated. Hereinafter, since the content of the effect changes when the player operates such an effect form, it is referred to as “participatory effect”. However, because there is a low probability that the hold notice effect will be performed, some players may not have the opportunity to operate the operation buttons provided for the effect as effective, and will be dissatisfied and reduce the interest of the game. There was a risk of it.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below relates to an invention relating to a gaming machine that makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of a game by expanding opportunities for participation in a participatory effect.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU that controls the production control may have a predetermined number (for example, “4” as the upper limit, or a smaller number) of the first reserved number of lottery results for the first special symbol. For example, it may be “3” or “2”), and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the hold change effect. That is, in this example, whether or not to perform a hold change effect on the condition that the command analysis processing (step S601) has analyzed that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board has been received. A lottery (referred to as a lottery for holding change effect) is performed.

  When it is decided to perform the hold change effect by the lottery of the hold change effect, the player can make the operation to the upper plate effect button 257 (FIGS. 22 and 31) effective, and the operation to the upper plate effect button 257 can be performed. Each time it is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 (FIG. 38), a hold change effect of changing the display color of the hold image representing the hold memory is performed.

[Hold change effect screen]
In the hold change effect of this example, the display color (referred to as the final display color) of the hold image to be finally displayed is determined based on the start winning timing. FIG. 178 (C) shows an example of the hold change effect screen displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (C), the left, middle and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In addition, the characters “The color of the hold changes when the button is pressed!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the operation to the upper plate effect button 257 (FIGS. 22 and 31) is performed. It is suggested that it is effective and prompts the player to operate the button.

  In addition, although it can set arbitrarily how long the effective period which validates operation to the above-mentioned top plate production | presentation button 257 (FIG. 22, FIG. 31) is transmitted, it transmits from a main control board as an example. Until the command control process (step S601) analyzes that the received next control command has been received.

  As the control command, for example, any one of a stop display command, a jackpot start command, a determination result notification command, a first hold number designation command, or a combination selected from a plurality of these control commands is used. Can do. In this example, for easy understanding of the explanation, it is assumed that the next stop display command transmitted from the main control board is received until it is analyzed in the command analysis processing (step S601).

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 performed subsequent to FIG. 178 (C). In FIG. 179 (A), as a result of the player performing an operation (first time) on the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, the fourth hold in FIG. 179 (C). It is shown that the display color of the reserved image 1524 (circular and display color “blue”) that has been stored and displayed in the normal display mode has changed to “green”.

  Although not explicitly shown in FIG. 178 (C) and FIG. 179, during the hold change effect, the display color of the hold image in the hold storage that is the target for the button operation by the player changes each time. The final display color of the hold image stored in the hold memory is determined in advance when it is determined to perform the hold change effect. In the specific example shown in the figure, it is assumed that the final display color of the target hold image in the hold storage is determined to be “red”. As a result, the display color of the target hold image in the hold storage is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 in the final display color determined as a result.

  In FIG. 179 (A), the characters “The color of the hold changes when you press the button!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. It is suggested that the operation to the button is effective, and the player is prompted to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 179 (B), as a result of the player operating the upper plate effect button 257 (second time) in response to the button operation suggestion to the player, in FIG. 179 (A), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular display color “green”) as the fourth hold storage has changed to “yellow”.

  Here, among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol “3”. The decorative pattern on the right continues to display variation.

  In FIG. 179 (B), the characters “The color of the hold changes when you press the button!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. It is suggested that the operation to the button is effective, and the player is prompted to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 179 (C), as a result of the player operating the upper plate effect button 257 (third time) in response to the button operation suggestion to the player, in FIG. 179 (B), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular display color “yellow”) as the fourth hold memory has changed to “rainbow”.

  Here, among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size on the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the symbol “3”. Only the decorative symbols in the decorative symbols continue to display the variation. In addition, the stop symbol “3” of the left and right decorative symbols indicates that reach has occurred.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 performed subsequent to FIG. 179 (C). In FIG. 180 (A), in response to the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board is specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, the changing medium decoration symbol 1600b is symbol “4”. And the reduced display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is eliminated, and the original position and size of the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are eliminated. As a result, the left decorative symbol is “3”, the middle decorative symbol is “4” and the right decorative symbol is “3”, and the decorative symbol variation stop result is “reach off”. This indicates that the player has been notified.

  In FIG. 180 (A), in response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis process of step S601, the display mode of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 indicates that “the color of the hold when the button is pressed”. Is disappearing, suggesting that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is no longer effective (the validity period for enabling the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 has ended). It has been shown.

  In this way, the hold change effect is performed on the condition that the number of holds indicated by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4). It has become. For this reason, the player is widely given an opportunity to perform the hold change effect. In addition, during the execution of the hold change effect, every time an operation is performed on the operation input device (the upper plate effect button 257), the hold memory (4 in this example) that is the target displayed in the hold number display area 1510 is displayed. The display color of the hold image 1524 in the (th hold storage) changes. Therefore, during the hold change effect, an opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only once but multiple times. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the reserved image in the target stored storage changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity which can participate in a hold production participation type production is expanded, the fall of game entertainment can be suppressed.

[Relationship between reserved memory digestion and reserved images]
180 (B) to 180 (C) show how the reserved memory is being digested. First, FIG. 180 (B) shows that after the four reserved memories in FIG. 180 (A), two reserved memories have been digested.

  The peripheral control MPU specifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, the left decorative design is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c are started.

  Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board is received by the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, The first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, and the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the second to fourth for the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A). On-hold images 1522 (display color “blue”), 1523 (display color “blue”), and 1524 display color “rainbow” displayed as the on-hold storage become the new first to third on-hold memories. 1521 (circular and display color “blue”), reserved image 1522 (circular and display color “blue”), and reserved image 1523 (circular and display color “rainbow”) are moved and displayed. The first pending the number of lottery result is "3".

  Next, in response to the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board is specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is “omitted, but out of place”. As a result, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol were stopped and displayed as a combination of disjoint symbols, and the player was informed that the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation stoppage was “displaced”. And

  Next, the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board are specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, and in response to this, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 The symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board is received in the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, , The first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A). 1523 (display color “blue”) and 1524 (display color “rainbow”) that were displayed as the second to third reserved memories for the first and second reserved memories are the reserved images 1521 ( The circle-shaped display color “blue”) is moved and displayed as a reserved image 1522 (the circle-shaped display color “rainbow”), and the first number of reserved lottery results is “2” for the first special symbol. FIG. 180B shows the result of the above process.

  Thereafter, in response to the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board is specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is omitted from the symbol. As a result, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as a combination of out-of-order symbols, and the player is informed that the result of the decorative symbol variation stoppage is “out-of-range”. I will do it.

  Next, the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board are specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, and in response to this, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 The symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board is received in the command analysis process (step S601), and in response to this, The first reserved memory for the first special symbol is digested, and the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the first special symbol in FIG. 180B is displayed. 15223 (display color “rainbow”), which was displayed as the second reserved memory for the image, becomes the new first reserved memory in FIG. 180C, and the reserved image 1521 (circular display color “red”). The first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “1”.

  In this way, in this example, the display color of the reserved image in the target storage stored in the above example is changed to “rainbow” by the player's operation to the upper plate effect button 257 during the hold change effect. The final display color of the hold image in the hold storage that is the target is determined in advance when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

  The effect developed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is closely related to the reach variation state and the big hit notification state of the lottery symbols displayed on the display panel, and the player's interest and attention The degree is very high.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is over, in other words, even after the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 has ended, 1 is stored in the first hold number display area 1510 as the hold memory is consumed. The display color of the hold image (the hold image in which the display color is changed) that is the target of sequentially moving the display position toward the th hold storage is maintained as it is without being changed. For this reason, when a player progresses a game, consideration is given so that the entertainment information provided from the display panel does not have an adverse effect and does not lower the interest of the game.

  In the specific example shown in the figure, when the hold image in the hold storage that is the target is displayed as the first hold storage in the hold number display area 1510, the display color is changed to the predetermined final display color “red”. As a result, the reserved image stored in the reserved storage is displayed. For this reason, the player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating will be given a surprise and surprise such as "That ...? Why has it turned to red?" Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player's game.

  FIG. 181 is a time schematically representing the hold change effect of this example, the change in the display color of the target hold image, and the display color of the hold image whose display position is to be changed as the hold memory is digested. It is a chart.

  As shown in FIG. 181, the variation time of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by the main control MPU and the variation time of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are approximately one. I'm doing it. In addition, during the change of the first special symbol, the value of the first special holding number counter of the main control MPU is updated to “4” due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2002, and the main control The first hold number designation command “4” is output from the board.

  Whether or not the peripheral control MPU performs the hold change effect on condition that the command analysis process (step S601) has analyzed that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board has been received. As a result of the lottery of the hold change effect, it is decided to perform the hold change effect in the lottery of the hold change effect. In this example, the fourth hold memory is set as the hold target of the effect, An operation (referred to as button operation) to the dish effect button 257 is validated. In addition, a reserved image 1524 of a normal display color (circle and display color “blue”), which is described as “blue 4” in the figure, is displayed as the fourth reserved storage determined as the production target. Yes.

  Further, in the hold change effect of this example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the start winning timing. Assume that the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “red”.

  In FIG. 181, the display of the hold image 1524 as the fourth hold memory determined as the production target described as “green 4” as a result of the first button operation performed by the player during the symbol change. The color has changed to “green”. Thereafter, as a result of the second button operation by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory that is described as “Yellow 4”, which is described as “Yellow 4”, is changed to “Yellow”. It has changed. Thereafter, as a result of the third button operation by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory, which is described as “Rainbow 4”, which is determined as the production target, is “Rainbow”. Has changed.

  Thereafter, a stop display command is output from the main control board based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol has stopped. The peripheral control MPU stops the variation of the decorative symbols on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis processing in step S601. At the same time, it is shown that the button operation is no longer valid (the validity period during which the operation to the upper plate effect button 257 is valid has ended).

  After that, the main control MPU displays the variation of the decorative symbol as the number of the first special symbol held is exhausted. In FIG. 181, each variation of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol of the first special symbol indicator is displayed. The display is performed three times. The first hold number designation command 3 (hereinafter, simply referred to as the hold number designation command 3) is output as the first hold memory is consumed, and the display position of the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 accordingly. And the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the production target is shifted to the reserved image as the third reserved memory described as “Rainbow 3” without changing the display color. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, the first hold number designation command 2 (hereinafter simply referred to as the hold number designation command 2) is output with the digestion of the second hold memory, and the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 accordingly. The display image is shifted and the hold image 1524 as the third hold memory determined as the production target is the hold image as the second hold memory described as “rainbow 2” without changing the display color. It is shifted and displayed.

  Further, as the third hold memory is consumed, the first hold number designation command 1 (hereinafter simply referred to as the hold number designation command 1) is output, and in response to this, the hold number display area 1510 displays the hold image. The display position is shifted, and the hold image 1524 as the second hold memory determined as the production target changes as the first hold memory described as “red 1” by changing the determined final display color. Is displayed shifted to the hold image.

[Processes related to pending storage by the peripheral control MPU]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in connection with the hold storage as each process of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168. In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the hold number designation command process (step A100), the hold change effect determination process (step A200), the hold change effect process (step A300), and the hold image shift process (step A400). To do. The substantial execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  When it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 168 is the first pending number designation command (hereinafter simply referred to as the pending number designation command), In the production control process of step S602, the hold number designation command process of step A100 is executed.

  In the hold number designation command process in step A100, when it is determined that the number of hold memories has reached a predetermined number (in this example, “4”, for example) as the execution condition of the hold change effect for changing the hold image In step A200, the pending change effect determination process is substantially executed.

  When the hold change effect determination process of step A200 is substantially executed and it is determined to perform the hold change effect, the hold change effect process of step A300 is substantially executed. In step A100, when it is determined that the number of holds has decreased by one, and it is determined that the display position of the hold image needs to be shifted, the hold image shift process is substantially executed.

[Hold count specification command processing]
The hold number designation command process is executed when it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 is a hold number designation command. It is transmitted from the main control board. The hold number designation command is a control command that is output when the hold number (memory number) managed in the main control board changes, and is a command that designates the hold number.
Hold number designation command “0” for designating the hold number “0 (none)”,
Hold number designation command “1” for designating the hold number “1”,
Hold number designation command “2” for designating the hold number “2”,
Hold number designation command “3” for designating the hold number “3”,
Hold number designation command “4” for designating the hold number “4” (upper limit number),
There are five types.

  FIG. 183 to FIG. 184 are flowcharts showing a subroutine of the pending number designation command processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the pending number designation command processing, first, the pending number designated by the pending number designation command analyzed by the command analysis in step S601 is “0” (hereinafter simply referred to as the designated pending number). ) Is determined (step A110).

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated hold number is “0”, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 0 to the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A111). ), The first to fourth reserved image storage areas set in the built-in RAM (not shown) are cleared (step A112), the subroutine for the number-of-holds designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram showing tables, storage areas, and processing operations necessary for the peripheral control MPU to perform each process related to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 188 (D), the built-in RAM is provided with the first reserved image storage area to the fourth reserved image storage area corresponding to the values 1 to 4 respectively in the first reserved number counter. .

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated hold number is not “0”, the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A113 and determines whether or not the designated hold number is “4” ( It is determined whether or not a predetermined number has been reached (step A113). In this example, it is determined to perform a hold change effect by a hold image on the condition that the value of the hold number has reached a predetermined number. The predetermined number is described as “4” in this example, but is not limited thereto. The predetermined number may be a smaller number, for example, “3” or “2”.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated hold number is “4”, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 4 to the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A114). ), The reserved image (circular shape) is set to the fourth in the reserved image storage area (step A115), the display color of the reserved image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A116), The execution flag for the changed effect determination process is set (step A117), and the suspension number designation command process subroutine is exited to return to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated number of holds is not “4”, the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A113. In this case, the designated number of holds is any one of “1”, “2”, and “3”. In step A114, the peripheral control MPU compares the designated hold number with the value of the first hold number counter (step A120).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the comparison result is an increase of “+1” (step A121). When it is determined that the comparison result is an increase of “+1”, for example, when the designated number of holds is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 2, for storing the number of holds The value is incremented by 1 in the first hold number counter (step A122), and the hold image (circular shape) is set in the hold image storage area (see FIG. 188 (D)) corresponding to the value of the first hold number counter (step A123). ), The display color of the hold image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A124), the subroutine for the hold number designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A121 that the result of the comparison is not an increase of “+1”, for example, if the designated hold number is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 4, or For example, when the designated hold number is “2” and the value of the first hold number counter is 3, the comparison result is “−1”.

  The peripheral control MPU determines that step A121 is NO, decrements the value of the first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A126), and sets the shift flag for executing the hold image shift process described later. 1 (execution) is set (step A127), the suspension number designation command process subroutine is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

[Hold change effect decision processing]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of hold change effect determination processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold change effect determination process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A130). The execution flag is set in step A117 of the pending number designation command processing described above.

  In step A130, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A130 determines NO, the peripheral control MPU executes the hold change effect determination processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. Return to the effect control process routine.

  In step A130, when it is determined that the execution flag is set, that is, when step A130 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control MPU acquires a random number (eg, 0 to 99) for holding change effect (step 0130). A131), with reference to the acquired random number for hold change effect and hold change effect determination table (step A132), it is determined whether or not the hold change effect is performed (step A133).

  FIG. 188 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution rate of a hold change effect determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (A), in this example, it is determined that the hold change effect is performed at a rate of 70%. A separate effect (an effect that is not a hold change effect) is performed for the remaining distribution ratio of 30%.

  In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines not to perform the hold change effect, that is, if step A133 is determined to be NO, the process proceeds to step A140 to clear the execution flag of the hold change effect determination process (step A140), the suspension change effect determination process subroutine is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the substantial hold change effect process described later is not executed.

  In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the hold change effect is to be performed, that is, if step A133 is determined to be YES, the process proceeds to step A134 and sets the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A134). . Thereby, execution of the hold change effect process is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a final display color random number (for example, 0 to 6) (step A135), refers to the acquired final display color determination random value and the final display color determination table, and determines the final display color. Is determined (step A136), and the reserved image having the determined final display color is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step A137).

  FIG. 188B is a diagram illustrating an example of a final display color determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (B), if the obtained final display color determination random number is “0”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “blue”, and if it is “1”, the reserved image is determined. The final display color is determined to be “yellow”. If it is “2”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”. If it is “3”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “orange”. If it is “4”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “purple”, if it is “5”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “red”, and if it is “6”, it is determined to be the reserved image Is determined to be “rainbow”.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets “1 (with memory)” to the storage flag indicating that the final display color has been stored (step A138), and indicates what number of the hold image is the target of the hold change effect. The number representing the display location, which is “4” in this example, is set to the value of the display location counter (step A139), the process proceeds to step A140, the execution flag of the hold change effect determining process is cleared (step A140), and the hold change effect is set. Exit the decision processing subroutine and return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the hold change effect process is executed.

[Hold change effect processing]
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of hold change effect processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold change effect process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A150). The execution flag is set in step A134 of the hold change effect determination process described above.

  In step A150, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A150 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the hold change effect processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the hold change effect is not substantially performed.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A150 that the execution flag is set, that is, if step A150 is determined to be YES, whether or not there is a button operation (whether the upper plate effect button 257 has been pressed) or not. Is determined (step A151). That is, the state in which the execution flag is set is a state in which an operation to the upper plate effect button 257 by the player is validated.

  In Step A151, when it is determined that there is a button operation, that is, when Step A151 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control MPU acquires an operation random number (for example, 0 to 6) (Step A152). Referring to the operation random number value and the operation display color selection table (step A153), the display color is determined (step A154), and the reserved image of the determined display color is the fourth hold shown in FIG. 188 (D). Store in the image storage area (step A155) and proceed to step A156.

  FIG. 188 (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation display color selection table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (C), if the acquired random number for operation is “0”, the display color of the reserved image is determined as “rainbow”, and if it is “1”, the display color of the reserved image is “Yellow” is determined. If “2”, the display color of the reserved image is determined as “green”. If “3”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined as “orange”. If so, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “purple”. If it is “5”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”. "Rainbow" is decided.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that there is no button operation, that is, if step A151 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU directly performs step A156 without performing steps A152 to A155. move on.

  In step A156, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a stop display command has been received (step A156). That is, the peripheral control MPU determines that a stop display command has been received when it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 is a stop display command.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A156 that a stop display command has been received, that is, if step A156 is determined to be YES, the execution flag of the hold change effect process is cleared (step A157), The subroutine of the hold change effect process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the subsequent hold change effect is not performed. Moreover, in this example, the state which validates operation to the top plate production | presentation button 257 by a player is complete | finished.

  In step A156, if the peripheral control MPU determines that no stop display command has been received, that is, if step A156 is determined to be NO, the process of step A157 is not performed, and the suspension change effect processing subroutine is performed. The process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, since the execution flag is set, the suspension change effect processing subroutine is subsequently executed. For this reason, every time there is a button operation, step A152 to step A155 are executed. For this reason, the display color of the reserved image changes.

  In this way, the hold change effect is performed on the condition that the number of holds indicated by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4). It has become. For this reason, the player is widely given an opportunity to perform the hold change effect. In addition, whenever the operation input device (top plate effect button 257) is operated during the execution of the hold change effect, the display color of the hold image 1524 to be displayed in the hold number display area 1510 is displayed. Change. Therefore, during the hold change effect, an opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only once but multiple times. Moreover, every time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the reserved image to be produced changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the hold change effect has been expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

[Hold image shift processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a subroutine for the hold image shift process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold image shift process, it first determines whether or not the shift flag is set (step A160). The shift flag is set in step A127 of the hold number designation command process described above.

  In step A160, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the shift flag is not set, that is, if it determines NO in step A160, the peripheral control MPU exits the suspended image shift processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the hold image display position is not substantially shifted (moved one place to the left).

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A160 that the shift flag is set, that is, if step A160 is determined to be YES, the second to fourth reserved image storage areas in FIG. 188 (D) are stored. The reserved images are respectively copied to the copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown) (step A161), the first to fourth reserved image storage areas are cleared (step A162), and the copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown). Are stored in the first to third reserved image storage areas (step A163). See FIG. 188 (E).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the storage flag is set (step A164). The storage flag is set in step A138 of the hold change effect determination process described above.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A164 that the storage flag is not set, that is, if step A164 is determined to be NO, the hold image shift process is performed without performing the processes in steps A165 to A169. Return to the effect control process routine. In this case, only the display position of the hold image is substantially shifted (moved one place to the left).

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step A164 that the storage flag is set, that is, if step A164 is determined to be YES, this indicates that the hold change effect has been performed. The peripheral control MPU decrements the value of the display location counter by 1 (step A165), and proceeds to step A166 to determine whether or not the value of the display location counter is “1 (position for displaying the hold image in the final display color)”. Determination is made (step A166). By the process of step A165, the display position of the reserved image that is the production target is updated.

  In step A166, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is not “1”, that is, if step A166 is determined to be NO, each processing of step A167 to step A169 is performed. Instead, the process exits the hold image shift process subroutine and returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, substantially only the shift of the display position of the hold image (moving to the left by one) is performed.

  On the other hand, in Step A166, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is “1”, that is, when Step A166 is determined to be YES, each processing of Step A167 to Step A169 is performed. Do. That is, the final display color hold image determined and stored in advance is stored in the first hold image storage area (step A167), the storage flag is cleared (step A168), and the display location counter is set to “0”. Set (step A169), the process exits the suspended image shift process subroutine and returns to the effect control process routine.

  Note that the hold image is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by outputting image data in the information output process in step S605 of FIG. 168.

  As is clear from the above description, even if the player has never performed a button operation, the hold image [normal display color “blue”] that is the target of the production is the first. When the display position is reached, the reserved image is displayed in the final display color determined and stored previously, and the display color changes.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is over, in other words, even after the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 has ended, 1 is stored in the first hold number display area 1510 as the hold memory is consumed. The display color of the hold image (the hold image in which the display color is changed) as an effect target for sequentially moving the display position toward the th hold memory is maintained without change. For this reason, when a player progresses a game, consideration is given so that the entertainment information provided from the display panel does not have an adverse effect and does not lower the interest of the game.

  In the specific example shown in the figure, when the hold image to be produced is displayed as the first hold memory in the hold number display area 1510, it is changed to a predetermined final display color, for example, “red”. The reserved image that is the target of the production is displayed. For this reason, the player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating will be given a surprise and surprise such as "That ...? Why has it turned to red?" Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player's game.

  As described above, the embodiment related to the hold change effect has been described. However, the hold image may change to a display color different from a normal display color, for example, “blue”, and the hold image may be displayed in the final display color at the final display position. The player's imagination is all about how it is received by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for changing the display color of the reserved image is that the reserved number has reached a predetermined number. For this reason, the determination of the main control MPU is not limited to pre-reading such as whether the content is a big hit or long reach with respect to the holding condition due to the winning at the start opening.

  In the above-described embodiment, the stop display command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot start command, the determination result notification command, the first hold number designation command Or any of them. For example, when a jackpot start command is received as the end of the button operation valid period, the button operation becomes effective over a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays until the jackpot game is started. The display color will change.

  For this reason, during the hold change effect, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only for the variable display by one decoration pattern but also for the variable display by a plurality of decoration patterns. . Moreover, every time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the reserved image to be produced changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the hold change effect has been expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

[First start port passing process including prefetch determination process]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a first start port passing process (second embodiment) executed by the main control MPU of the main control board instead of the first start port passing process of FIG. 157. When the main control MPU starts the first start port passage processing, the main control MPU first obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is determined based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the maximum value (upper limit value) is “4” (step S200).

  In step S200, if it is determined that the counter value (the number of first special symbol hold) by the first special hold number counter is not the maximum value, that is, if step S200 is determined to be YES, the first In order to put the special symbol variable display control in a new hold state, the following steps S201 to S206 are performed.

  When proceeding to step S201, the main control MPU acquires various random number values from various random number counters (step S201). The random number values acquired in step S201 are a first special random number, a reach random number, a first symbol random number, and a variable random number.

  Next, the main control MPU increments the value of the first special reservation number counter by 1 (+1) (step S202). Next, each random number acquired in step S201 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S203).

  When the process of step S203 is completed, the process proceeds to a prefetch determination process (described later) (step S204), and among the random numbers acquired in step S201, a prefetch determination using a first special random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number is performed. Execute the process. In the pre-reading determination process, a start winning command reflecting information such as jackpot determination, reach determination, and loss is set. When the main control MPU finishes the prefetch determination process, the main control MPU proceeds to step S205.

  Here, the prefetch determination process is a dedicated determination process for determining the prefetch effect at the time of winning the start opening, but the same process as the big hit determination process and the fluctuation pattern process executed at the start of the fluctuation based on the hold is executed. You may determine by doing.

  In step S205, it is determined whether or not a condition for transmitting a prefetch command (in this case, a start winning command) is satisfied (step S205). The determination process in step S205 is because there is a condition that prohibits transmission of the prefetch command from the main board (main control board) to the sub board (peripheral control board). For example, when the second special symbol is a priority change, it is not permitted to transmit a prefetch command for the first special symbol for the short-time gaming state.

  In step S205, if it is determined that the transmission condition of the prefetch command (in this case, the start winning command) is satisfied, that is, if it is determined YES in step S205, the start winning command including the prefetch determination result is set ( In step S206), the first starting port passage process (second embodiment) subroutine is exited, and the process returns to the special symbol process process routine.

  Here, the start winning command including the prefetch determination result may be a command indicating only the prefetch determination result, or a command integrated with information other than the prefetch determination result (for example, a command indicating the number of reserved balls). You may send it. By integrating the pre-read information and other information, it is possible to reduce the number of times that information is unnecessarily transmitted as command transmission.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S200 that the number of first special symbols held is the upper limit value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, step S200 is determined to be NO, and without executing the processes of steps S201 to S206, the subroutine of the first start port passing process (second embodiment) is exited and the process returns to the special symbol process process routine. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S205 that the pre-read command (in this case, the start winning command) can be transmitted, that is, if step S205 is determined to be NO, the process of step S206 is executed. Without passing, that is, without sending a start winning command, the subroutine of the first start port passing process (second embodiment) is exited and the process returns to this routine of the special symbol process.

[Second starting port passage processing including pre-reading determination processing]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a second start port passing process (second embodiment) executed by the main control MPU of the main control board instead of the second start port passing process of FIG. When the main control MPU starts the second start port passing process, first, the counter value by the second special reservation number counter is obtained from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is determined based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the maximum value (upper limit value) is “4” (step S220).

  In step S220, if it is determined that the counter value (the number of second special symbols held) by the second special reservation number counter is not the maximum value, that is, if step S220 is determined to be YES, the second In order to put the special symbol variable display control in a new hold state, the following steps S222 to S226 are performed.

  When proceeding to step S221, the main control MPU acquires various random number values from various random number counters (step S221). The random number values acquired in step S221 are a second special random number, a reach random number, a second symbol random number, and a variable random number.

  In addition, the random number acquired here may be a dedicated random number related to the second start port, or may be a random number shared with the first start port. By using the combination, it is possible to reduce processing and circuits related to generation of these random numbers.

  Next, the main control MPU increments the value of the second special reservation number counter by 1 (+1) (step S222). Next, each random number acquired in step S221 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S223).

  When the process of step S223 is completed, the process then proceeds to a prefetch determination process (described later) (step S224), and among the random numbers acquired in step S221, a prefetch determination using a second special random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number. Execute the process. In the pre-reading determination process, a start winning command reflecting information such as jackpot determination, reach determination, and loss is set. When the main control MPU finishes the prefetch determination process, the main control MPU proceeds to step S225.

  Here, the pre-reading determination process is a dedicated determination process for determining a pre-reading effect at the time of winning the start opening, but the same pre-reading process is performed at the first start opening and the second start opening described above. May be. Moreover, you may determine by performing the process similar to the jackpot determination process and the fluctuation pattern process performed at the time of the fluctuation | variation start based on the said holding | maintenance.

  In step S225, it is determined whether or not a condition for transmitting a prefetch command (in this case, a start winning command) is satisfied (step S225). The determination process in step S225 is because there is a condition that prohibits transmission of the prefetch command from the main board (main control board) to the sub board (peripheral control board).

  In step S225, when it is determined that the transmittable condition of the prefetch command (in this case, the start winning command) is satisfied, that is, when step S225 is determined as YES, the start winning command including the prefetch determination result is set ( Step S226), the subroutine of the second starting port passage process (second embodiment) is exited, and the process returns to this routine of the special symbol process.

  In this example, the look-ahead command (start winning command) for the second start port has the same contents as the first start port. Note that the pre-read command for the first start port and the pre-read command for the second start port may be commands having the same contents, or may be a command that allows the first start port and the second start port to be identified.

  When the first start port and the second start port are set as a common prefetch command, it is not necessary to identify the prefetch command between the first and second on the receiving sub-side. Therefore, the determination becomes easy.

  The start winning command set in step S206 and step S226 is transmitted to the peripheral control board in the special symbol command control process in step S16 of FIG. 155 (b).

  On the other hand, in the process of step S221, when it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is the upper limit value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, step S220 is determined to be NO, and the subroutine of the second starting port passage process (second embodiment) is exited without returning to the routine of the special symbol process process without executing the processes of steps S221 to S226. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S225 that the prefetch command (in this case, start winning command) transmission condition is not satisfied, that is, if step S225 is determined to be NO, the process of step S226 is executed. Without passing, that is, without sending a start winning command, the subroutine of the second start port passing process (second embodiment) is exited and the process returns to the main routine of the special symbol process.

[Prefetch determination processing]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a prefetch determination subroutine executed by the main control MPU. When starting the prefetch determination process, the main control MPU first executes a jackpot determination process (step S210). Since the big hit determination process (see FIG. 161) has been described above, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  If the first special random number acquired in step S201 or the second special random number acquired in step S221 is a value that belongs to the jackpot by executing the jackpot determination process, the jackpot flag is set and the first special random number is set. When the random number or the second special random number is a value that does not belong to the jackpot, that is, when the random number is out of place, the reach random number acquired in step S201 or the reach random number acquired in step S221 belongs to a value that generates reach. A flag is set.

  FIG. 192 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used for big hits set in the main control unit, and FIG. 192 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used for loss reach. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used at the time of loss.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 192 and 193, the values are biased with respect to the ratio variation pattern of the random random number determination value and the number of pseudo-continuous times. For example, in the big hit table, the higher the expectation level, the higher the super B and the higher the number of pseudo-continuations, the higher the allocation rate, and the lower the expected level, such as normal, the lower the allocation rate.

  For example, the variation patterns 11 to 13 are set as determination values (61 to 104) indicating that 44 types of variation random numbers of 105 types of variation random numbers are executed three times or more in the super B by the pseudo continuous number of times, Fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 are set as determination values (0 to 14) indicating that 15 types of fluctuation random numbers execute normal.

  On the other hand, in the table at the time of reach loss, contrary to the big hit, the higher the expectation super B and the higher the number of pseudo-continuous times, the lower the distribution rate, and the lower the normality, the higher the distribution rate is. I have to.

  For example, the variation patterns 22 to 26 are set as determination values (86 to 104) indicating that 19 types of variation random numbers out of 105 types of variation random numbers execute Super B, and the variation patterns 14 to 16 Are set as determination values (0 to 53) indicating that 54 types of variable random numbers execute normal.

  As shown in FIG. 193, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, 40 kinds of fluctuation random numbers out of 105 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 39) indicating that the fluctuation pattern 27 without pseudo-continuity is executed. , 30 kinds of variable random numbers are set as determination values (40 to 69) indicating that the fluctuation pattern 28 for one pseudo-run is executed, and 20 kinds of variable random numbers execute the fluctuation pattern 29 for two pseudo-runs. Is set as a determination value (90 to 94) indicating that the five kinds of variable random numbers are to be executed in the pseudo-continuous four-time fluctuation pattern 30, and ten types of variable random numbers are set. It is set as a determination value (95 to 104) indicating that the variation pattern 31 is executed three times.

  When the main control MPU finishes the jackpot determination process, the main control MPU proceeds to step S211 and determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S211). If the big hit flag is set (YES in step S211), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the big hit is selected (step S212), the big hit flag is reset (step S213), and the process proceeds to step S218.

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S211 (NO in step S211), it is determined whether or not the reach flag is set (step S214). If the reach flag is set in step S214 (YES in step S214), the variation pattern table at the time of reach is selected (step S215), the reach flag is reset (step S216), and the process proceeds to step S218.

  In step S214, when it is determined that the reach flag is not set (NO in step S214), that is, neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, and the normal failure (failure of not performing the reach effect). If so, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation is selected (step S217), and the process proceeds to step S218. .

  When the main control MPU proceeds to step S218, the main control MPU selects the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number obtained in step S201 or step S221, and issues a start winning command corresponding to the type of variation pattern. Determination is made (step S218), the subroutine of the prefetch determination process is exited, and the process returns to the original start port passage process routine of the return destination. As described above, the start winning command including information on the variation pattern such as whether or not a big hit or whether or not a reach is generated is determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each random number is stored in association with each other.

  Also, in the variation pattern table at the time of big hit and reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the variable random number. Has been.

  For example, in the variation pattern table at the time of the big hit, 15 types of variation random numbers out of 105 types of variation random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 14) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 36 types of variation random numbers. Is set as a determination value (15 to 50) indicating that one of the super-reach A effects with a low degree of jackpot expectation is executed, and 54 types of variable random numbers execute one of the super-reach B effects with a high degree of expectation of big hit It is set as a determination value (51-104) indicating that

  Super-reach B production is higher than the normal reach production or the super-reach A production, and the player who wants to generate a big hit gaming state has a big hit gaming state when the super reach B production is executed. The expectation of the player for is increasing.

  Further, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach, 54 kinds of fluctuation random numbers among 105 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 53) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 32 kinds of fluctuation random numbers. Is set as a judgment value (54 to 85) indicating that one of the super-reach A effects with a low degree of jackpot expectation is executed, and 19 types of variable random numbers execute one of the super-reach B effects with a high degree of expectation of big hit It is set as a judgment value (86 to 104) indicating that

  The fluctuation pattern table (big hit, reach, normal loss) may be shared by the first starting port (Special Figure 1) and the second starting port (Special Figure 2), or may be selected at different rates. It is also possible to provide a variation pattern table set in (1). In the case of sharing, the special pattern 1 and the special figure 2 do not have to have a variation pattern table, so that the storage capacity can be reduced. In addition, the processing for selecting the variation pattern can be made common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  On the other hand, when the special pattern 1 and the special figure 2 are each provided with a variation pattern table, it is possible to draw a variation pattern at a different rate, or it is possible to provide a variation pattern dedicated to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 become. Instead of making all (big hit, reach, normal loss) fluctuation pattern tables non-common, only some of the fluctuation pattern tables (for example, normal loss fluctuation pattern table) may be different.

[Pseudo-variation of decorative design]
For example, some of the above-described super-reaches (A) and (B), which are out of normal fluctuation effects, include a variation pattern of pseudo-variable variation display. In the pseudo-ream, during the production corresponding to one determination of success / failure, that is, on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner and stopped. In the meantime, the decorative symbol performs a variation display and a stop display a plurality of times, and an effect that gives the player the illusion that a plurality of determinations of success / failure are executed in one variation.

  For example, in the example of the variation pattern in which the pseudo-ream is performed three times, the start of variation display is the start of the first variation, and after the first temporary stop is performed, the first re-variation is performed. At the time of temporary stop, the combination of temporary stop symbols is temporarily stopped. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, for example, the temporary stop and re-variation are performed for the number of times set in the variation pattern, and after the second temporary stop, the second re-variation is performed. After the third temporary stop, the third re-variation (final re-variation) is performed, and at the end of the last re-variation, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays the final stop symbol (definite stop symbol). A combination of jackpot symbols or a combination of missed symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of a variation pattern that reaches reach, at the time of the last re-variation, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays a reach symbol and reaches a reach state, and a reach effect is performed. The reach may be established at the first temporary stop. In this case, re-variation is re-varied for the subsequent symbols that have not been re-variable.

  Furthermore, with regard to the outcome at the time of temporary stop, a special stop symbol that does not appear when making a final stop may be temporarily stopped as an opportunity, or in any or all of the left, right, and middle symbols, You may temporarily stop a symbol dedicated to the pseudo-ream that does not appear in the fixed stop.

[Preliminary notice accompanying the quasi-ream fluctuation with decorative patterns]
FIG. 194 is a time chart schematically showing the pseudo-continuous variation due to the decorative design and the notice effect accompanying the pseudo-continuous variation. In FIG. 194, a variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation is performed three times is shown as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board are specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is responded accordingly. In the display panel, the symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started. For example, see FIG.

  In the peripheral control MPU, it is determined that the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. In addition, during the pseudo-continuous change, it is determined to perform a notice effect for each re-change. After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change, after entering a pseudo-continuous change and after the first temporary stop (for example, after the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c stop at the temporary stop symbol) A first re-variation is performed. It is shown that the notice effect (notice 1) is being performed with the first re-variation. The notice effect will be described later.

  Then, after the second temporary stop is performed by the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b, and the right decorative design 1600c, the second re-variation is performed. It is shown that the notice effect (notice 2) is performed with the second re-variation.

  Thereafter, after the third temporary stop is performed by the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c, the third re-variation (last re-variation) is performed. It is shown that a notice effect (notice 3) is being performed with the third re-variation.

  Then, the fluctuation is stopped in response to the stop display command received from the main control board being specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing in step S601. For example, as shown in FIG. 180 (A), the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is stopped and displayed at the symbol “4”, and the left, middle, and right decoration symbols in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are displayed. The reduced display is canceled and the display is returned to the original position and size at the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. As a result, the left decorative symbol is “3”, the middle decorative symbol is “4”, and The right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol “3”, indicating that the player has been notified that the decorative symbol variation stop result is “reach off”. This also indicates that the notice effect is also ended.

[Specific example of notice effect]
FIG. 195 shows a specific example of the notice effect. FIG. 195 shows an example of the notice effect using the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the notice that the notice effect is performed in accordance with the variation pattern in which the pseudo-variation described previously in FIG. 194 is performed three times. 1, display examples of notice 2, notice 3, and notice 3 are shown. Note that the notice effect in this example is implemented by text display or voice or “serif” expressed by both text display and voice.

  Note that the notice effect is not limited to “serif”, but lamps / LEDs, sound (speakers 130, 222, 262, etc.), movable accessories (for example, the upper movable effect unit 2560, the lower movable effect unit). 2570, the back upper movable effect unit 3100, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back lower rear movable effect unit 3500, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, etc. are used as appropriate. ), It is only necessary to produce an effect by any one of the effect devices of the display by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and not only the effect of each effect device alone, but a plurality of such as a lamp and sound, a lamp and sound, and a movable accessory. It may be based on a combination in the production device.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (A), when the notice effect is executed, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced on the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and the variable display is executed (first time). Pseudo-variable). Furthermore, for example, “What is it?” Is displayed at the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 as “notice 1”, and the word “what?” Is indicated to the player by the notice. It is shown that.

  As will be described later, the notice effect of the present embodiment notifies the player of the degree of reliability that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit. Moreover, seven types of notifications PTN1 to PTN7 are prepared for the notification effect of this example. Further, the reliability indicated by the notice is high or low, PTN1 is the lowest, the reliability increases in ascending order according to the number attached, and PTN7 is the highest.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (B), in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, for example, the text “PTN4” is written as “Notice 2”. It is shown that it is a suggestion by the notice to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuations such as pseudo continuous fluctuations are performed, and when a notice effect is performed over a plurality of fluctuations, the reliability of the suggested notice is not lowered (so-called no downfall is generated). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's game interest from decreasing in the course of the game.

  In the example shown in the figure, the reliability of the PTN4 line that is the second notice effect is higher than the reliability of the PTN2 line that is the first notice effect. Here, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size on the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are reduced and the variable display is executed (second pseudo continuous change).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 195 (C), in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, for example, “Waku Waku ♪ Waku Waku ♪” is written as “Notice 3” as a line of PTN6. Characters are displayed, indicating that this is a suggestion to the player by a notice.

  In the example shown in the figure, the reliability of the PTN 6 line that is the third notice effect is significantly higher than the reliability of the PTN 4 line that is the second notice effect. Therefore, depending on the player, it reminds me that I am approaching a big hit.

  It should be noted that here, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the upper right part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are reduced and the variable display is executed (third pseudo continuous change).

[Determination of notice in the notice effect]
FIG. 196 is a diagram showing the level of reliability of the notice (serif) in the notice effect and the notice lottery distribution table used for determining the notice (serif) in the notice effect.

[Reliability of notice in notice production]
As described above, seven types of PTN1 to PTN7 are prepared for the lines suggested in the notice effect of this example. Further, the reliability indicated by the notice PTN of the notice effect is the lowest in PTN1, the reliability increases in ascending order according to the assigned numbers, and PTN7 is the highest. FIG. 196 shows that the reliability of the serif PTN is “PTN1 <PTN2 <PTN3 <PTN4 <PTN5 <PTN6 <PTN7”.

[Notice lottery sorting table]
In the present embodiment, the notice to be displayed for each change in the notice effect is the notice value stored in the peripheral control ROM (not shown, hereinafter simply referred to as “ROM”) and the obtained value of the random number for notice determination obtained by lottery. It is determined by the lottery allocation table. As shown in FIG. 196, in the notice lottery distribution table, different notice lines PTN for notice effects are set depending on the type of variation pattern.

  For example, in the variation pattern 1 to the variation pattern 8, the notice lottery table 1 is selected. When the notice lottery table 1 is selected, five types of lines PTN1 to PTN5 can be selected. Further, for example, in the variation pattern 9 to the variation pattern 22, the notice lottery table 2 is selected. When the notice lottery table 2 is selected, seven types of lines PTN1 to PTN7 can be selected.

[Distribution of notices selected by notice lottery distribution table]
In the notice lottery distribution table shown in FIG. 196, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 1, the notice lottery table 1 is selected. If the acquisition value (hereinafter referred to as the acquisition value) of the random number for preliminary announcement determination acquired by lottery is in the range of 0 to 200, “PNT1” is selected and determined as the preliminary announcement, and the acquired value is in the range of 201 to 400. If “PNT2” is selected and determined as the notice and the acquired value is in the range of 401 to 600, “PNT3” is selected and determined as the notice. If the acquired value is in the range of 601 to 800, “PNT4” is selected as the notice. Is selected and determined, and if the acquired value is in the range of 801 to 1000, “PNT5” is selected and determined as a notice.

  In the case of the variation pattern 22, the notice lottery table 2 is selected. If the acquired value is in the range of 0 to 100, “PNT1” is selected and determined as the advance notice. If the acquired value is in the range of 101 to 200, “PNT2” is selected and determined as the advance notice, and the acquired value is 201 to 300. If “PNT3” is selected and determined as the advance notice and the acquired value is in the range of 301 to 400, “PNT4” is selected and determined as the advance notice and the acquired value is in the range of 401 to 600, If “PNT5” is selected and determined as a notice and the acquired value is in the range of 601 to 800, “PNT6” is selected and determined as the notice. If the acquired value is in the range of 801 to 1000, “PNT7” is selected as the notice. The selection is decided.

  The allocation of the acquired values set in the notice lottery distribution table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 196, and the distribution ratio of the acquired values may be reduced as the reliability of the notice increases. Further, the distribution ratio in the middle of the reliability (PTN4) may be increased, and the distribution ratio of the acquired values on both sides (PTN1 and PTN7) may be lowered. By increasing the distribution ratio in the middle of the reliability, the intermediate value of the reliability can be easily selected, and both ends of the reliability can be hardly selected. In this way, by using the notice lottery table in which the distribution ratios of the acquired values are different, it is possible to make a lottery notice lottery.

  In FIG. 196, it is described that one notice lottery table is selected for one variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of notice lottery tables may be selected using one variation pattern. The selection method may be switched based on a predetermined gaming state such as a random number method or a gaming state.

[Number of pseudo-reams]
Further, in this example, depending on the type of the variation pattern, whether or not to perform the pseudo-continuous and, when it is determined to perform the pseudo-continuous, the number of the pseudo continuous is determined. When it is determined to perform the pseudo-ream, the determined number of pseudo-reams is determined in the range of 1 to a maximum of 5 times. Note that, according to the number of pseudo-series, they are expressed as pseudo-series 1, pseudo-series 2, pseudo-series 3, pseudo-series 4, and pseudo-series 5.

[Preventing a decline in the reliability of the notice in the notice effect]
In the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuations such as pseudo-continuous fluctuations are performed, and when performing a notice effect over a plurality of fluctuations, the reliability of the suggested notice is not reduced (so-called so-called downfall is not generated). ) Is considered.

  Therefore, in this example, in the pseudo-continuous variation, the upper limit value of the random number for notice determination to be the next lottery is switched based on the acquired value of the random number for notice determination obtained by the first lottery. Yes.

[Example of the value obtained from the random number for determining the notice]
In the case where the pseudo-run 3 is determined in advance, it is determined whether or not the pre-announcement effect is to be executed for each change of the pseudo-run. In order to do this, the lottery of the random number for schedule determination is performed three times. In the notice lottery distribution table of FIG. 196, for example, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern 22, the total number of schedule determination random numbers is 1001 (0 to 1000).

  First, the last notice, that is, the third notice in the pseudo-ream, random number lottery is performed within the range of 0 to 1000, and if the acquired value is 700, the third notice is determined to be the serif PTN6.

  Next, when the upper limit value of the random number for preliminary announcement determination that is subject to the lottery twice based on the acquired value 700 is switched, in this case, it is switched to 800 which is the upper limit value of the acquisition range of the random number for preliminary determination in PTN6. Thus, in the second notice in the pseudo-ream, a random number lottery is performed in the range of the notice determination random number from 0 to 800, and if the acquired value is 350, the second notice is determined to the line PTN4.

  Next, when the upper limit value of the random number for notice determination to be a lottery object is switched based on the acquired value 350, in this case, the upper limit value of the acquisition range of the random number for notice determination in PTN4 is changed to 400. Thus, for the first notice in the pseudo-ream, a random number lottery is performed in the range of the notice determination random number from 0 to 400, and if the acquired value is 150, the first notice is determined to be the line PTN2.

  Then, the determined lottery results of these three notice effects are stored in a notice data storage area set in a RAM (not shown). In this case, the first notice is stored in the notice data storage area 1, the second notice is stored in the notice data storage area 2, and the third notice is stored in the notice data storage area 3. Is remembered.

[Random number for notice determination]
The notice determination random number used in the above-mentioned lottery is a so-called ring counter whose value is cyclically updated (for example, the value is incremented by 1) within a range of 0 to an upper limit (for example, 1000). In this example, the peripheral control MPU is configured by a software counter that performs control processing (for example, random number update processing in step S606 in FIG. 168). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a random counter that randomly updates a predetermined range, or may be a counter that is updated as hardware.

Further, in this example, in order to realize the random number lottery described above, seven random number counters corresponding to the random numbers for determination with different upper limit values corresponding to the seven types of preliminary notifications by distribution being prepared. Is provided. As shown in FIG.
The value of the random number counter 1 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 1000).
The random number counter 2 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 800),
The value of the random number counter 3 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 600),
The random number counter 4 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 400),
The random number counter 5 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 300),
The random number counter 6 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 200),
The value of the random number counter 7 is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to the upper limit value (= 100).

  Note that, as described above, the random number for notice determination is not limited to a random number counter having a plurality of upper limit values, but may be a single random number counter. In that case, it is necessary to change the upper limit value of the random number counter as appropriate as the upper limit value of the random number for notice determination is changed.

  When the upper limit value of the random number counter is changed, the current value indicated by the random number counter may be a value exceeding the upper limit value. In this case, if the random number counter is generated by software, it is necessary to correct it to a value that does not exceed the upper limit value by calculation or the like. Various methods can be considered for the calculation. For example, when the random number counter sets a new upper limit value, if a value exceeding the upper limit value is set, the upper limit value is subtracted from the set value. The subtracted value may be used as the initial position of a new random number counter.

[Processes related to the notice effect by the peripheral control MPU]
FIG. 197 (A) is a flowchart showing each process related to determination of the notice effect by the peripheral control MPU as each process of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168. In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the notice effect determination process (step A450) and the notice effect process (step A500). The substantial execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  When it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 168 is a variation pattern command, the notice effect determination process in step A450 is performed in the effect control process in step S602. Practically executed.

  When the notice effect determining process in step A450 is substantially executed and it is determined to perform the notice effect, the notice effect determined in the notice effect process in step A500 is executed.

[Advance notice decision processing 1]
In the notice effect determination process 1 (first embodiment) described below, when the main control MPU that transmits the change pattern determines the change pattern, the change time of the change and information on whether or not to perform a pseudo-ream And the information on the number of times of quasi-continuation are set so as to be identifiable in the variation pattern command. When it is determined to perform the pseudo-ream, the determined number of pseudo-reams is determined in a range of 1 to a maximum of 5 times. Depending on the number of pseudo-series, pseudo-series 1, pseudo-series 2, pseudo-series 3, pseudo-series 4, and pseudo-series 5 are provided.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice effect determination process 1 executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice effect determination process 1, first, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to execute a pseudo-continuity (step A200).

  If it is determined in step A200 that the variation pattern does not execute the pseudo-continuous, that is, if step A200 is determined to be NO, the process proceeds to step A207, and another effect is selected (step A207). Without performing the preliminary notice effect determination process 1, the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 1 is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  In step A200, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the variation pattern is to execute a pseudo-ream, that is, if step A200 is determined to be YES, it sets an execution flag for the notice effect process (step S200). A201).

  Next, the number of quasi-continuations is specified by the variation pattern (step A202), the number of quasi-continuations is stored in the re-variation number storage area CN1 set in the RAM (not shown) (step A203), and the variation is determined from the variation pattern. The timing of the pseudo sequence in time is set in the timer (step A204). Note that the timer value set in the timer is decremented by one by a timer subtraction process (not shown) until the value becomes zero every predetermined period (for example, every 2 ms).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU copies the number of pseudo-continuations stored in the re-variation count storage area CN1 to the storage counter CN2 (step A205). Here, the storage counter CN2 is a counter whose value can take a range of 1 to 5, as shown in FIG. 201 (B), for designating a notice data storage area corresponding to the value. It is a counter. For example, when the number of pseudo-continuations is 3, the value of the storage counter CN2 is “3”, and for example, when the number of pseudo-continuations is 5, the value of the storage counter CN2 Becomes “5”.

  Next to step A205, the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A206 to execute the notice determination process (step A206). When the notice control process is exited, the peripheral control MPU exits the notice effect determination process 1 subroutine and returns to the effect control process routine.

[Preliminary decision processing]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing a subroutine for notice determination processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice determination process, first, the reference part of the notice lottery distribution table shown in FIG. 196 is specified by the type of the variation pattern (step A230). Here, the reference part of the advance notice lottery distribution table means an assignment section shown in a tabular form on a horizontal line in the advance notice lottery table selected corresponding to the type of variation pattern.

  For example, when the type of the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 22, the notice lottery table 2 is selected as shown in FIG. The distribution division in the notice lottery table 2 is a range of 0-100, a range of 101-200, a range of 201-300, a range of 301-400, a range of 401-600, a range of 601-800, and a range of 801-1000. 7 divisions.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU obtains a notice determination random number (step A231). In this case, since this is the first time, the random number counter 1 whose upper limit value shown in FIG. 201A is set to “1000” is targeted, and the value is acquired (simply referred to as an acquired value).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines the type of notice based on the acquired value and the identified reference unit (step A232). For example, when the acquired value is “750”, the type of the notice (line) to be determined is “PTN6”. Next, the determined type of notice data is stored in the notice data storage area corresponding to the value of the storage counter CN2 (step A233).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 201 (B), if the value of the storage counter CN2 is “3”, the notice data “PTN6” is stored in the notice data storage area for the third re-variation. If the value of the storage counter CN2 is “5”, the notice data “PTN6” is stored in the notice data storage area for the fifth revariation.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU changes the notice determination random number to the upper limit value corresponding to the acquired value acquired in step A231 (step A234). For example, when the above-described acquired value is “750”, the random number counter 2 shown in FIG. 201 (A) is set so as to be the value (800) that is the upper limit value of the acquisition range in the identified reference unit. The target is changed. Next, in response to storing one piece of the advance notice data, the value of the storage counter CN2 is decremented by -1 (step A235), the process proceeds to step A236, and the value of the storage counter CN2 is set to "0 (storage complete)". It is determined whether or not (step A236).

  If it is determined in step A236 that the value of the storage counter CN2 is not “0 (storage complete)”, that is, if step A236 is determined to be NO, the process returns to step A231 to change the target random number The notice determination random number is acquired by the counter 2 (step A231). The above processing routine is repeated until the value of the storage counter CN2 becomes “0”.

  If the value of the storage counter CN2 is “2”, an example will be described. If the acquired value in step A231 is 350, the second notice data is determined to be “PTN4”, and the notice data “PTN4” is reproduced again. The change is stored in the second notice data storage area.

  In step A234, based on the acquired value 350, the random number counter 4 shown in FIG. 201 (A) that is the object of one lottery is set so that the value (400) that is the upper limit value of the acquisition range is obtained. The target is changed. In step A235, the value of the storage counter CN2 becomes “1”, and after determining that step A236 is NO, the process returns to step A231, and the random number for notice determination is acquired by the random number counter 4 whose target has been changed.

  If the acquired value in step A231 is 150, the first notice data is determined to be “PTN2”, and the notice data “PTN2” is stored in the first notice data storage area for re-variation. In step A234, based on the acquired value 150, the target is changed to the random number counter 6 shown in FIG. 201 (A) to be the lottery target so that the value (200) which is the upper limit value of the acquisition range is obtained. However, in step A235, the value of the storage counter CN2 becomes “0”, and step A236 is determined to be YES, and if the notice determination process is exited, the notice effect determination process 1 subroutine is exited and the effect control process routine is executed. Return to.

  As a result, “notice 6”, “notice 4”, and “notice 2” are stored as the notice data in the notice data storage area in the order of the third change, the second time, and the first change. Each time the random number lottery described above is performed, the upper limit of the notice determination random number is usually small, although there is a possibility that the same sorting division as the previous one may occur. For this reason, the determined notice data is determined from the one with high reliability to the one with low reliability, and the notice data is stored in the notice data storage area in the order of the third change, the second time, and the first change. When it is determined in step A236 that the value of the storage counter CN2 is “0”, the notice determination process subroutine is exited, and the notice effect determination process 1 subroutine is exited and the effect control process is performed. Return to the routine. In this way, the advance notice stored in the advance notice data storage area has the same or higher degree of advance notice as the re-variation progresses.

[Notice effect processing]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a sub-routine of the notice effect process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice effect process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A210). The execution flag is set in step A201 of the notice effect determination process 1 described above.

  In step A210, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A210 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the notice effect processing subroutine without performing substantial processing. Return to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the notice effect is not substantially performed.

  In step A210, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if step A210 is determined to be YES, it determines whether or not it is the advance notice timing (step A211).

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A211 that it is not the notice timing, that is, if step A211 is determined to be NO, the notice control process subroutine is exited without performing the substantial process without performing substantial processing. Return to the routine. In this case, the notice effect is not substantially performed.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A211 that it is the advance notice timing, that is, if step A211 is determined as YES, the value of the storage counter CN2 is incremented by 1 (step A212), and the value of the storage counter CN2 The notice data stored in the notice data storage area corresponding to is transferred to the output area (step A213), and the process proceeds to step A214. Note that the value of the storage counter CN2 is determined to be “0” in step A236 of the notice determination process in FIG.

  In this case, “PTN2” is transferred to the output area as the first notice data corresponding to the value “1” of the storage counter CN2 at the first re-variation.

  When the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A214, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the value of the storage counter CN2 has reached the value of the re-variation count storage area CN1 (number of pseudo-continuations) (step A214). If it is determined in step A214 that the value of the storage counter CN2 has not reached the value of the re-variation number storage area CN1 (number of pseudo-reams), that is, if step A214 is determined to be NO, a notice effect The process subroutine is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  The notice data transferred to the output area in step A213 is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 as image data (in this case, “PN2”) in the information output process in step S605 of FIG. 168. It is realized by doing.

  Hereinafter, the value of the storage counter CN2 is kept until the value of the storage counter CN2 reaches the value of the re-variation count storage area CN1 (number of pseudo-reams) every time the notice timing is reached with the execution flag set. The notice data stored in the notice data storage area corresponding to is transferred to the output area. Therefore, in the case of pseudo-ream 3, the notice data “PTN4” is transferred to the output area at the second re-variation, and the notice data “PTN6” is outputted at the third re-change after that. Transferred to the region.

  In step A214, it is determined that the value of the storage counter CN2 has reached the value of the re-variation number storage area CN1 (number of pseudo-continuations), that is, step A214 is determined to be YES, and the re-variation number is stored. The area CN1 is set to 0 (step A215), the storage counter CN2 is set to 0 (step A216), the execution flag for the notice effect process is cleared (step A217), and the notice control process subroutine is exited and the effect control is performed. Return to the processing routine. Note that the notice effect is ended when the execution flag of the notice effect process is cleared.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing a plurality of fluctuations, such as pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and performing a notice that suggests reliability over a plurality of fluctuations, the reliability of the suggested notice does not decrease. (So as not to cause so-called fall). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's game interest from decreasing in the course of the game.

[Second Example of Notice Production]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control MPU that transmits the variation pattern determines the variation pattern, it is determined that the variation time of the variation, information on whether or not to perform the pseudo-continuation, and the pseudo-continuation are performed. The information on the number of pseudo-continuations is set to be identifiable as a variation pattern command. However, when the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control board to the peripheral control board specifies only the fluctuation time, the notice effect is given by the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command. It may be determined whether to perform or not.

  For example, if the notice effect is performed when the change time of the change is short (for example, less than 20 seconds), the change display of the change will end immediately. May decrease. In the present embodiment, the notice effect is performed when the variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined variation time (20 seconds or more in this example). Note that the variation pattern type is identifiable, and the variation pattern type is the variation pattern 22 shown in FIG.

[Notification effect determination process 2]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of notice effect determination processing 2 (second embodiment) executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice effect determination process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is equal to or longer than a predetermined time at which the pseudo-run can be executed. (Step A240).

  If it is determined in step A240 that the variation time is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time during which the pseudo-run can be executed, that is, if step A240 is determined to be NO, the substantial notice effect determination process 2 is not performed. Then, the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 2 is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  In step A240, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the variation time is equal to or greater than the predetermined time during which the pseudo-ream can be executed, that is, if step A240 is determined to be YES, the notice effect random number (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained (step A241), and the obtained random number for the notice effect and the notice effect determination table are referred to (step A242), and it is determined whether or not the notice effect is performed (step A243).

  FIG. 201 (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution rate of a notice effect determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 201 (C), in this example, it is determined to perform the notice effect at a distribution rate of 70%. Another production (production that is not a notice production) is performed for the remaining distribution ratio of 30%.

  In step A243, if the peripheral control MPU determines not to perform the notice effect, that is, if step A243 is determined as NO, the peripheral control MPU performs the notice effect determination process 2 without performing the substantial notice effect determination process 2. Exit the subroutine and return to the effect control process routine. In this case, the substantial notice effect process described later is not executed.

  In step A243, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the notice effect is to be performed, that is, if step A243 is determined as YES, the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A244 and sets the execution flag of the notice effect process (step A244). Thereby, execution of the notice effect process is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a pseudo-continuous random number (for example, 0 to 4) (step A245), refers to the acquired pseudo-continuous random number and the frequency determination table, and determines the number of pseudo-continuous. (Step A246), the determined number of pseudo-continuations is stored in the re-variation number storage area CN1 of the RAM (Step A247).

  FIG. 201D is a diagram illustrating an example of the number of times determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 201 (D), if the obtained random number for determining the pseudo-continuous number is “0”, the number of pseudo-continuous is determined to be “1 time, pseudo-continuous 1”, and the acquired pseudo-continuous number is determined. If the value of the random number for use is “1”, the number of pseudo-continuations is determined as “2 times, and the number of pseudo-continuations 2”. If the value of the random number for determining the quasi-continuous number is “3”, the number of quasi-continuous is determined as “4, quasi-continuous 4”, and the acquired quasi-continuous number is determined. If the value of the random number for determining the number of times is “4”, the number of pseudo-continuations is determined as “5, pseudo-ream 5”.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets the timing of the pseudo sequence in the variation time in the timer (step A248). Note that the timer value set in the timer is decremented by one by a timer subtraction process (not shown) until the value becomes zero every predetermined period (for example, every 2 ms).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU copies the number of pseudo-continuations stored in the re-variation count storage area CN1 to the storage counter CN2 (step A249). Here, the storage counter CN2 is a counter whose value can take a range of 1 to 5, as shown in FIG. 201 (B), for designating a notice data storage area corresponding to the value. It is a counter. For example, when the number of pseudo-continuations is 3, the value of the storage counter CN2 is “3”, and for example, when the number of pseudo-continuations is 5, the value of the storage counter CN2 Becomes “5”.

  Next to step A249, the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A250 to execute the notice determination process (step A250). When the notice control process is exited, the peripheral control MPU exits the notice effect determination process 2 subroutine and returns to the effect control process routine. Note that the notice determination process is as shown in FIG. 199 described above. Further, the notice effect processing is as shown in FIG.

[Variation of notice determination process]
The notice effect determination process 1 and the notice effect determination process 2 described above determine that the notice effect is to be performed along with the pseudo-series based on the fact that the peripheral control MPU has specified the variation pattern in the command analysis process in step S601. Before the pseudo-ream starts, use the random number for determination (0 to 1000) for the preliminary suggestion at each re-variation of the pseudo-ream and use the obtained value of the random number for determination every time the preliminary determination is determined By changing the upper limit value, the reliability of the notices that are sequentially suggested is determined so as not to decrease.

[Third embodiment related to notice effect]
For example, in the case of pseudo-ream 3, the above-mentioned pre-announcement effect determination process 1 and pre-notification effect determination process 2 are performed by predetermining the first notice, the second notice, and the third notice before the pseudo-rendition starts. ing. In the third embodiment described below, a suggestion notice (reliability) is determined every time each re-variation of the pseudo-series is performed. For example, in the case of pseudo-ream 3, the first notice is determined, for example, at the first temporary stop of the pseudo-ream, and the second notice is, for example, at the second temporary stop of the pseudo-ream. For example, the third notice is determined at the time of the third temporary stop of the pseudo-ream.

[Second Embodiment of Each Process Related to Notice Effect by Peripheral Control MPU]
FIG. 197 (B) is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in relation to the pseudo continuous variation as each process as the second embodiment of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168. In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the notice effect determination process 3 (step A550), the notice determination process 2 (step A560), and the notice effect process 2 (step A570). The substantial execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  When it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 168 is a variation pattern command, the notice effect determination process 3 in step A550 is performed in the effect control process in step S602. Is substantially executed.

  When the notice effect determining process 3 in step A550 is substantially executed and it is determined to perform the notice effect, the notice determining process 2 in step A560 is substantially executed.

  Similarly, the notice effect processing 2 in step A570 is substantially executed when the notice effect determination process 3 in step A550 is substantially executed and it is determined to perform the notice effect.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the notice determination random number counters used are seven random number counters 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 201A. . In contrast, the notice determination random number counter used in the third embodiment is different in that only the random number counter 1 shown in FIG.

[Random number update processing]
FIG. 197 (C) is a flowchart showing a process executed by the peripheral control MPU in connection with the update of the random number for notice determination in the third embodiment as one process of the random number update process of step S606 of FIG. 168. . In this process, the peripheral control MPU increments the value of the notice determination random number by 1 (decreases the value of the random number counter by 1) (step A300).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number value exceeds an upper limit value (1000 in this case) (step A301). If it is determined that the updated random number value does not exceed the upper limit value (1000 in this case), that is, if step A301 is determined to be NO, the process is exited.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A301 that the updated random number value has exceeded the upper limit value (1000 in this case), that is, if step A301 is determined to be YES, the lower limit value storage area of the RAM (not shown). Is set to the value of the random number for notice determination (the lower limit is set to the value of the random number counter) (step A302). Then, the process is exited.

  As an example, when the lower limit value stored in the lower limit value storage area is “301”, the value of the random number for notice determination (random number counter 1) is the upper limit in consideration that the random number update process is executed every 16 ms. When the value is exceeded, in step A302, the value is cyclically updated within the range of the lower limit value (= 301) to the upper limit value (= 1000).

[Notification effect determination process 3]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice effect determination process 3 (third embodiment) executed by the peripheral control MPU in the third embodiment. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice effect determination process 3, first, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is equal to or longer than a predetermined time at which the pseudo-run can be executed. (Step A260).

  If it is determined in step A260 that the variation time is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time during which the pseudo-run can be executed, that is, if step A260 is determined to be NO, the substantial notice effect determination process 3 is not performed. Then, the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 3 is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  In step A260, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the variation time is equal to or greater than the predetermined time during which the pseudo-ream can be executed, that is, if step A260 is determined to be YES, a random number for notice effect (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained (step A261), and the obtained random number for notice effect and the notice effect determination table are referred to (step A262), and it is determined whether or not the notice effect is performed (step A263).

  FIG. 201 (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution rate of a notice effect determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 201 (C), in this example, it is determined to perform the notice effect at a distribution rate of 70%. Another production (production that is not a notice production) is performed for the remaining distribution ratio of 30%.

  In step A263, if the peripheral control MPU determines not to perform the notice effect, that is, if step A263 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU performs the notice effect determination process 3 without performing the substantial notice effect determination process 3. Exit the subroutine and return to the effect control process routine. In this case, the substantial notice effect process described later is not executed.

  In step A263, if the peripheral control MPU determines to perform the notice effect, that is, if step A263 is determined to be YES, the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A264 and sets the execution flag of the notice effect process 2 (step A264). Thereby, execution of the notice effect process 2 is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires a pseudo-continuous random number (for example, 0 to 4) (step A265), refers to the acquired pseudo-continuous random number and the frequency determination table, and determines the number of pseudo-continuous. (Step A266) The determined number of pseudo-continuations is stored in the re-variation number storage area CN1 of the RAM (Step A267).

  FIG. 201D is a diagram illustrating an example of the number of times determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 201 (D), if the obtained random number for determining the pseudo-continuous number is “0”, the number of pseudo-continuous is determined to be “1 time, pseudo-continuous 1”, and the acquired pseudo-continuous number is determined. If the value of the random number for use is “1”, the number of pseudo-continuations is determined as “2 times, and the number of pseudo-continuations 2”. If the value of the random number for determining the quasi-continuous number is “3”, the number of quasi-continuous is determined as “4, quasi-continuous 4”, and the acquired quasi-continuous number is determined. If the value of the random number for determining the number of times is “4”, the number of pseudo-continuations is determined as “5, pseudo-ream 5”.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets the pseudo-ream timing in the variation time in the timer (step A268). Note that the timer value set in the timer is decremented by one by a timer subtraction process (not shown) until the value becomes zero every predetermined period (for example, every 2 ms).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets 0 (default value) to the storage counter CN2 (step A269). Here, the storage counter CN2 is a counter whose value can take a range of 1 to 5. For example, when the number of pseudo-reams is 3, the value of the storage counter CN2 is “1” to “3”. When finishing the step A269, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the notice effect determination process 3 and returns to the effect control process routine.

[Preliminary decision processing 2]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart illustrating a subroutine of the advance notice determination process 2 executed by the peripheral control MPU in the third embodiment. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice determination process 2, it first determines whether or not an execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set (step A270). The execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set in step A264 of the notice effect determination process 3 described above.

  In step A270, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A270 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the advance notice determination process 2 without performing substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the notice is not substantially decided.

  In step A270, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if step A270 is determined to be YES, it determines whether or not it is a notice determination timing (step A271). Note that the timing of the advance notice determination can be arbitrarily set as long as it is a pseudo-ream, but in this example, it is a temporary stop time that is performed before the decorative symbols are re-varied.

  In step A271, if the peripheral control MPU determines that it is not the notice determination timing, that is, if step A271 is determined to be NO, it performs the effect control through the notice determination process 2 subroutine without performing substantial processing. Return to the processing routine. In this case, the notice is not substantially decided.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A271 that it is the advance notice determination timing, that is, if step A271 is determined as YES, the process proceeds to step A272. The peripheral control MPU specifies the reference part of the notice lottery distribution table shown in FIG. 196 by the type of the variation pattern (step A272). Here, the reference part of the advance notice lottery distribution table means an assignment section shown in a tabular form on a horizontal line in the advance notice lottery table selected corresponding to the type of variation pattern.

  For example, when the type of the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 22, the notice lottery table 2 is selected as shown in FIG. The distribution division in the notice lottery table 2 is a range of 0-100, a range of 101-200, a range of 201-300, a range of 301-400, a range of 401-600, a range of 601-800, and a range of 801-1000. 7 divisions. In the following description, it is assumed that the type of the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 22.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU obtains a notice determination random number (step A273). In this case, since this is the first time, the random number counter 1 in which the upper limit value shown in FIG. 201A is set to “1000” is set (by default, the value is updated from 0 to 1000 and incremented by +1 and then updated) The range of 0 to 1000, which is the value when the value is reset to 0), is acquired, and the value is acquired (simply referred to as an acquired value). In this case, since it is the first time, the value of 0 to 1000 is the acquisition range for the determination of the advance notice.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines the type of notice based on the acquired value and the identified reference unit (step A274). For example, when the acquired value is “150”, the type of the notice (line) to be determined is “PTN2”. Next, the notice data of the determined type is transferred to the output area (step A275). In this case, the first notice data “PN2” is transferred to the output area.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU stores the lower limit value corresponding to the acquired value acquired in step A275 in the lower limit value storage area (step A276). For example, when the above-described acquired value is “150”, the lower limit value “101” illustrated in FIG. 196 is set to the lower limit value so as to be the value (101) that is the lower limit value of the acquisition range in the identified reference portion. Stored in the value storage area. Then, the subroutine of the notice determination process 2 is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. As a result, the notice indicated at the time of the first re-variation of the pseudo-ream is determined as “PTN2” and transferred to the output area.

[About changing the lower limit of random numbers]
When the acquired value acquired in step A273 is “150”, the value of the random number for notice determination (random number counter 1) updated in step A300 of FIG. 197C is always greater than “150”. Become. Considering that the value in the lower limit storage area is changed to “101” by step A276 and the random number update process is executed every 16 ms, the notice determination random number (random number counter 1) exceeds the upper limit value. Since the value is changed to the lower limit value (= 101), the value is cyclically updated within the range of the lower limit value (= 101) to the upper limit value (= 1000).

  In the third embodiment, the lower limit value of the random number for determining the notice is changed, but the upper limit value of the random number for determining the notice may be changed even when the notice is drawn by lot every change. Is possible. In that case, the reliability of the notice shown in FIG. 196 is set in reverse. That is, in the order of reliability, PTN1 is maximized and PN7 is minimized.

  Alternatively, the notices distributed in the notice lottery distribution table are in the reverse order. In the case of the variation pattern 22, the point that the notice lottery table 2 is selected is the same, but if the acquired value is in the range of 0 to 100, "PNT7" is selected and determined as the notice, and the acquired value is 101 to 200. If “PNT6” is selected and determined as the advance notice and the acquired value is in the range of 201 to 300, “PNT5” is selected and determined as the advance notice and the acquired value is in the range of 301 to 400, If “PNT4” is selected and determined as a notice and the acquired value is in the range of 401 to 600, “PNT3” is selected and determined as the notice. If the acquired value is in the range of 601 to 800, “PNT2” is selected as the notice. If the selection is determined and the acquired value is in the range of 801 to 1000, “PNT1” is selected and determined as a notice.

[Notice effect processing 2]
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the notice effect processing 2 executed by the peripheral control MPU in the third embodiment. When the peripheral control MPU starts the notice effect process 2, it first determines whether or not an execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set (step A280). The execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set in step A264 of the notice effect determination process 3 described above.

  In step A280, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if step A280 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the notice effect processing 2 without performing substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the notice effect is not substantially performed.

  In step A280, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if step A280 is determined to be YES, it determines whether or not it is the advance notice timing (step A281).

  In step A281, if the peripheral control MPU determines that it is not the notice timing, that is, if step A281 is determined to be NO, it skips the notice effect processing subroutine without performing substantial processing, and performs the effect control process. Return to the routine. In this case, the notice effect is not substantially performed.

  In step A281, if the peripheral control MPU determines that it is the advance notice timing, that is, if step A281 is determined as YES, the advance notice data transferred to the output area is output (step A282), and the advance notice data is set to 1. The value of the storage counter CN2 is incremented by 1 in response to the output (step A283), and the process proceeds to step A284. Note that the value of the storage counter CN2 is set to “0” in step A269 of the notice effect determination process 3 in FIG.

  In this case, “PTN2” is output from the output area at the first re-variation. Further, the notice data output in step A282 is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by outputting image data (in this case, “PN2”) in the information output process in step S605 of FIG. 168. Realized.

  When proceeding to step A284, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the value of the storage counter CN2 has reached the value of the re-variation count storage area CN1 (number of pseudo-continuations) (step A284). When it is determined in step A284 that the value of the storage counter CN2 has not reached the value of the re-variation number storage area CN1 (number of pseudo-reams), that is, when it is determined NO in step A284, a notice effect The process 2 subroutine is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  Hereinafter, in a state in which the execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set, each process of step A272 to step A276 in the notice determination process 2 in FIG. 204 is executed every time the notice determination timing comes. Therefore, the random number for notice determination acquired in step A273 is acquired in the range from the lower limit value (= 101) to the upper limit value (= 1000).

  If the acquired value of the random number for notice determination acquired in step A273 is “350”, the second notice data is determined as “PTN4”, and the notice data “PTN4” is transferred to the output area. In addition, as for the notice to be determined, a notice having the same or higher reliability is determined as the number of re-variations progresses. If the acquired value acquired in step A273 is “350”, the lower limit value is changed to “301” in step A276.

  Further, in the state where the execution flag related to the notice effect process 2 is set, each process of step A282 to step A283 and the determination process of step A284 in the notice determination process 2 in FIG. The The determination process in step A284 is determined as NO until the value of the storage counter CN2 matches the number of times stored in the re-variation number storage area (number of pseudo-reams). Therefore, every time the notice timing comes, notice data in the output area is output until the value of the storage counter CN2 reaches the value of the re-variation number storage area CN1 (number of pseudo-reams). Therefore, in the case of pseudo-ream 3, the notice data “PTN4” is output from the output area at the time of the second re-variation, and is displayed as image data in the information output process.

  After that, when the third notice determination process 2 is executed, the notice determination random number acquired in step A273 is acquired within the range from the lower limit (= 301) to the upper limit (= 1000). If the acquired value of the random number for notice determination obtained in step A273 is “750”, the third notice data is determined as “PTN6”, and the notice data “PTN6” is transferred to the output area. If the acquired value acquired in step A273 is “750”, the lower limit value is changed to “601” in step A276.

  After that, at the time of executing the third notice effect processing 2, “PTN6” is output from the output area in step A282. The notice data output in step A282 is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by outputting image data (in this case, “PN6”) in the information output process in step S605 of FIG. 168. Realized.

  In step A283, the value of the storage counter CN2 is incremented by 1, so that the value of the storage counter CN2 reaches the value of the re-variation count storage area CN1 (number of pseudo-continuations) (in this case, 3). That is, step A284 is determined as YES, 0 is set in the re-variation number storage area CN1 (step A285), 0 is set in the storage counter CN2 (step A286), and “ "0 (default value of lower limit)" is set and returned (step A287), the execution flag for the notice effect process is cleared (step A288), the subroutine for the notice effect process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  Note that the notice effect ends when the execution flag of the notice effect process 2 is cleared. Further, when the execution flag of the notice effect process 2 is cleared, the notice determination process 2 of FIG. 204 is also not executed.

  As described above, in the example of quasi-continuation 3 in the variation pattern 22, the notice “PTN2” is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in the first revariation, and the notice “PTN4” is displayed in the central liquid crystal display in the second revariation. Displayed on the device 1500, the notice “PTN6” is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in the third re-change.

  Note that FIG. 197 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the history of the update range of the random number for notice determination in the third embodiment when pseudo-ream 3 is implemented in the variation pattern 22 in a table format. The initial notice determination random number (random number counter 1) has a range of lower limit (= 0) to upper limit (= 1000) as an acquisition value target, and the first acquisition value is “150”. Accordingly, the lower limit value is changed to “101”, and the second notice determination random number (random number counter 1) has a range from the lower limit value (= 101) to the upper limit value (= 1000) as an acquisition value target. The acquired value for the second time was “350”. Accordingly, the lower limit value is changed to “301”, and the third notice determination random number (random number counter 1) is the target of the acquired value in the range from the lower limit value (= 301) to the upper limit value (= 1000). The acquired value for the third time was “750”. Accordingly, the lower limit value is changed to “601”. Since the random number lottery is performed up to three times, the lower limit value is returned to “0 (default value)” (step A287 in FIG. 205).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing a plurality of fluctuations such as pseudo continuous fluctuations and performing a preliminary announcement that suggests reliability over a plurality of fluctuations, the reliability of the preliminary announcement that is determined and suggested by random number lottery The degree is not lowered (so as not to cause a so-called fall). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's game interest from decreasing in the course of the game.

  According to the gaming machine according to the embodiment, the notice lottery information stored in the notice lottery table 1 or 2 based on the predetermined information corresponding to the number of times the notice is executed over a plurality of variations due to the decorative symbols. The notice effect mode to be executed is selected, and the selected notice effect form is determined as the notice corresponding to the number of times. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a large number of tables for determining the mode of the notice effect in the stage effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, and the burden of development man-hours is not imposed. In addition, notices determined in correspondence with the number of times are sequentially executed. For this reason, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the fun of the game.

  In addition, when determining the notice corresponding to the number of times, the notice effect mode is determined so that the reliability of the notice effect mode executed at a later number of times is not lower than the notice effect mode executed at a later number of times. To do. Therefore, the reliability does not decrease in the notice effect that suggests the reliability. For this reason, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a notice is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 as a notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice effect is not limited to display, but depends on light emission, sound, and movement of a movable accessory. It may be a production.

[Prefetching notice effect]
In the above-described embodiment, the fall of the reliability of the content of the effect that is sequentially suggested in time series in the notice effect is implemented in accordance with the re-variation of the quasi-continuation. It is also possible to apply to production.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect is a notice effect executed from a change display before the start of the change display to be notified. That is, it may be possible to prevent the fall of the reliability in the form of the notice effect that sequentially suggests in time series across a plurality of symbol variations in the state in which the prefetch notice effect is executed.

[Others]
The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In the function display unit 1400, a special lottery result is suggested under direct control by the main control board. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display) is to turn on / off the LED for a predetermined time, and then turn on A special lottery result is suggested by the combination of LEDs.

  On the other hand, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board based on a control signal from the main control board and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol row in a state where three symbol rows composed of a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. The symbol strings are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbol strings are stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol strings to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, a final image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the lottery An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result is generated.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (the symbol string fluctuates to confirm the image) The time until the function display unit 1400 is set to be shorter.

  Further, in the peripheral control board, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the upper movable effect unit 2560 and the lower movable effect according to the lottery special lottery result. Unit 2570, back upper movable effect unit 3100, back lower front movable effect unit 3200, back right movable effect unit 3300, back left movable effect unit 3400, back lower rear movable effect unit 3500, back four corner movable effect unit 3600, etc. The movable effect is appropriately used, and the player can be entertained also by the movable effect, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back right rotating decoration body 3310 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is rotated when the game ball can be received with respect to the upper prize opening 2006. When the third decoration surface 3310c is directed forward (front), the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guide passage 2553 through which the game balls received in the upper prize winning port 2006 circulate coincide with the back right ball inlet 3320. (See FIG. 175). In this state, when a game ball is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006, the ball guide member that enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guide path 2553 and is arranged in the back right effect space 3321. By 3322, it flows down while rotating a plurality of times (here, 8 times) around the axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  As a result, the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 can be spiraled down in the back right effect space 3321, so that the player can surely see the game ball accepted in the upper prize winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for paying out the game ball by accepting the game ball at the upper prize opening 2006 and to entertain the player with the game ball flowing down in a spiral shape. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the ball guiding member 3322 is disposed adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the game ball flows down the ball guiding member 3322 to a player who is paying attention to the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Can be easily recognized. In this example, the ball guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to be adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500. However, a part or all of the ball guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to overlap with the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The guiding member 3322 may be easily recognized that a game ball is flowing down. In this case, the ball guiding member 3322 is formed of a transparent member whose back can be visually recognized, so that it is possible to prevent the visual effect displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 from being obstructed.

  When the upper prize winning opening 2006 is in the open state, when the back right rotation decorative body 3310 is facing the front except for the third decorative surface 3310c, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guiding path 2553 is the first decorative surface 3310a. And the second decorative surface 3310b is closed by the outer peripheral surface, so that the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear guide passage 2553 and escapes. It is discharged downward through the passage 2555. Thus, when the upper prize winning opening 2006 becomes acceptable, an effect using the back right effect space 3321 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 is performed, or an effect not using the back right effect space 3321 is performed. It can be enjoyed by presenting various variations to the player. In addition, even if the back right rotating decorative body 3310 cannot turn the third decorative surface 3310c forward due to some reason, the game ball received in the upper prize winning hole 2006 is stagnated in the rear guiding path 2553. And the game can be continued without any problems.

[10. Fast digestion of jackpot games]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game can be digested in a shorter time than a conventional game machine in which a big winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a. Details will be described below.

  As described above, when the ball launcher 680 is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a with a driving strength that is equal to or greater than a predetermined driving strength, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 is The game ball that has entered the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface comes into contact with the stopper 1006 and is weakened, and then enters the upper game space 2541 from the upper right entrance.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 176, the upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball abutted against the stopper 1006 and weakened its momentum is rolled by the upper right entrance. The direction of movement is limited and it will fall down.

  In the state where the upper prize winning opening 2006 is opened, the upper end of the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 is made higher than the lower end, so that the game ball abutting on the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 can be raised with a very high probability. In addition to receiving the winning prize opening 2006, the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 is rotated so that the upper end of the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 is located to the right of the front view from the upper right entrance.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, no obstacle nail is planted in the upper game space 2541, so that the game ball falling from the upper right entrance comes into contact with the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 with a very high probability. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 and has fallen from the upper right entrance with the upper university winning opening 2006 opened is extremely A high probability of being accepted into the top prize opening 2006.

  In this way, since the top prize winning opening 2006 is arranged near the upper right end of the gaming area 5a, it is driven into the gaming area 5a rather than the conventional gaming machine in which the big winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the gaming area 5a. The moving distance until the game ball is received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 is shortened, and the game ball that has entered the right side of the outermost surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 is extremely Since the ball winning device 2006 is received with a high probability, the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball into the game area 5a until the game ball is received in the game winning port 2006 can be shortened. As a result, a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game can be digested in a shorter time than the conventional gaming machine in which the big winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the gaming area 5a.

  Further, a game ball that is placed with a driving strength higher than a predetermined driving strength by the ball launching device 680 by placing the upper university winning opening 2006 in the vicinity of the upper right end of the gaming area 5a is placed in the hitting portion 1006. Since it is configured to roll along the inner side of the outer rail 1001 without being in contact with obstacles such as obstacle nails until it comes into contact, it is possible to enter the upper big prize opening 2006. The ball rolls at a certain speed or more, and at least the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball into the game area 5a until the game ball comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 can be shortened. That is, the ball launching device 680 has a game area compared to a case where a game ball is driven with a driving strength less than a predetermined driving strength so as to be able to enter the upper prize opening 2006. It is possible to shorten the period from when the game ball is hit into 5a until the game ball is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006.

  In other words, when the upper prize winning opening 2006 is arranged near the upper left end of the game area 5a and the game ball is driven by the ball launcher 680 with a driving strength less than the predetermined driving strength, Compared to the case where it is possible to enter the upper university winning opening 2006, the upper university winning opening 2006 is arranged near the upper right end of the game area 5a and the ball launcher 680 has a predetermined driving strength or more. Since the game ball is configured to be able to enter the upper prize winning opening 2006 when the game ball is driven with the driving strength of the ball, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased. Can shorten the period from when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a until the game ball is received at the upper prize winning opening 2006, and a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game can be digested in a short time. .

  In addition, since the ball launcher 680 is designed to strike one game ball about every 0.6 seconds, for example, the time required to strike 10 game balls is 6 seconds. In addition, as described above, the game ball that has been driven by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength that is equal to or greater than the predetermined driving strength is in contact with an obstacle such as an obstacle nail until it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006. Since the ball rolls along the inner side of the outer rail 1001, the ball launcher 680 hits the game ball with a driving strength greater than or equal to a predetermined driving strength and enters the game area 5a. The period until it is received in the mouth 2006 is extremely short (about 1 second).

  That is, the period from when the top prize winning opening door member 2550 is opened in one round in the big hit game until the ten game balls are received at the top prize winning opening 2006 is about half that of the conventional gaming machine. The period is about 7 to 8 seconds, and the interval period between the rounds (the period from closing the top prize winning opening 2006 to opening again) is shorter than the conventional gaming machine (about 2.0 seconds). Since it is about 0.6 seconds, if it is a 15-round jackpot game, it will be finished in about 113.4 seconds to 128.4 seconds.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example can shorten the time required for the big hit game as compared with the conventional gaming machine, so it is executed per unit time by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display. The number of executions (variable display times) of the variable display of the possible symbols (the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display) It can be increased more than gaming machines, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed by increasing the chances of generating big hits. In addition, since the execution period of the jackpot game executed on the conventional gaming machine can be shortened to about half, the jackpot game itself can be interested, and the decrease in the game entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 enters the back right sphere entrance 3320 from the back discharge port 2554 of the back guide path 2553, and the back right effect space. The ball guide member 3322 arranged at 3321 flows down while rotating around the axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 a plurality of times (here, 8 times) (see FIG. 175 (a)). ). As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the game ball flowing down the ball guiding member 3322 can be visually recognized in a fragmentary manner by the player. It takes about 2 seconds for the game ball flowing down the ball guiding member 3322 to be discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 and difficult for the player to see. As described above, the period from when the game ball is driven by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength greater than or equal to the predetermined driving strength and entering the game area 5a to being accepted into the top prize winning opening 2006 is 1 Since it is about seconds, the period from when the game ball is struck by the ball launcher 680 to when it is received at the upper prize opening 2006, after the game ball is received at the upper prize opening 2006, is shown. This is shorter than the period until the player becomes difficult to see from the outlet 3303a.

  As described above, not only the rolling of the game ball in the game area 5a that the player pays attention to, but also the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 that is not normally noticed is complicatedly rolled and discharged. By extending the period until the game ends, the player can be noticed, and the game ball that has become a so-called dead ball by being accepted into the upper prize winning hole 2006 is effectively used to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. be able to. In addition, since the period from when a game ball is struck by the ball launcher 680 to when it is received at the upper prize winning hole 2006 is short, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game sphere that has been struck, and the game ball is smoothly struck. You may feel uneasy about what is going on, but game balls are steadily driven by increasing the period until the game balls received at the upper prize opening 2006 are rolled in a complex manner and discharged. It is possible to reassure the player that he / she is confused. Also, the period from when a game ball is struck by the ball launcher 680 to when it is received by the upper prize winning opening 2006, after the game ball is received by the upper prize winning opening 2006, is discharged from the outlet 3303a of the back lower right base 3303. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the game ball received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 by making it shorter than the period until it is difficult to see from the player.

[11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is shot into the game area 5a to change the game state, the back drive motor of the back movable effect unit 3100 according to the changed game state. 3103 rotates. When the back drive motor 3103 rotates, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 attached to the unit base 3101 rotate together with the back drive motor 3103. When the first transmission member 3107 rotates and enters the first specific rotation range from one end of the first specific rotation range, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117. Thus, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates. When the first transmitted member 3117 rotates, the first movable base 3116 extends from the base end which is one of both ends of the first movable range extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100 to the distal end side opposite to the base end. That is, it slides from the retracted position at the upper end toward the first appearance position below. Since the back upper decorative body 3152 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body 3152 moves downward as the first movable base 3116 slides. It becomes. Thereafter, the first transmission member 3107 rotates to reach the range end on the opposite side of the first specific rotation range, and at the same time, the first movable base 3116 reaches the tip on the opposite side of the first movable range, that is, the descending end. In addition, when the first transmission member 3107 moves away from the first specific rotation range, the first movable base 3116 stops moving at the lower end. The second transmission member 3108 is rotating even while the first transmission member 3107 is rotating. However, since the second transmission member 3108 is not within the second specific rotation range, the second transmission member 3108 is rotating. Thus, the second movable base 3119 is not slid relative to the first movable base 3116.

  A second movable base drive member 3124 to which rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116. Since the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached to the rotation link member 3123 in the direction in which the second transmission guide portion 3123d extends (second direction), when the first movable base 3116 slides, The rotary link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 rotate so that the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, and the second movable base drive member 3124 becomes the rotary link member 3123. It slides relative to the second direction. At this time, when the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates, the second movable base 3119 slides relative to the first movable base 3116 by the amount that the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates, and the back decoration 3152 The second movable base 3119 moves slightly in the moving direction. However, when the second direction becomes parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124 stops, and the first The movement of the backside decorative body 3152 with respect to the movable base 3116 is also stopped. Since the moving direction of the second movable base 3119 is the same as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, even if the second movable base 3119 slides slightly due to the rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124, The player is not noticed and the back decorative body 3152 can be moved without a sense of incongruity. In the initial state, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotary link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 do not rotate, and the second movable base. 3119 does not slide relatively.

  Subsequently, the first transmission member 3107 is separated from the first specific rotation range by the rotation of the back drive motor 3103, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are further rotated, and the second transmission member 3108 is rotated. When entering the second specific rotation range from one end of the second specific rotation range, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122 and the second transmitted member 3122 starts rotating. To do. When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates, the rotary link member 3123 is slidably attached in the extending direction (first direction) of the first transmission guide portion 3122e to the second transmitted member 3122. Will revolve around. When the rotary link member 3123 revolves, the extending direction in the second direction tends to rotate. Then, when the orientation in the second direction (rotating link member 3123) tries to rotate, the rotating link is such that the reaction force from the part where the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached in the second direction is reduced. The second movable base drive member 3124 is rotated while the member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction, respectively. The rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is rotated by the second transmitted member 3122 and the rotation link. It can be transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 via the member 3123.

By transmitting the rotation to the second movable base drive member 3124, the second movable base 3119 is moved from the base end (upper end) which is one of both ends of the second movable range with respect to the first movable base 3116. The first base 3116 slides in the same downward direction as the moving direction of the first base 3116 toward the opposite tip (lower end) side. Accordingly, the back decorative body 3152 attached to the second movable base 3119 also moves downward together with the second movable base 3119.
Thereafter, the second transmission member 3108 rotates to reach the range end on the opposite side of the second specific rotation range, and at the same time, the second movable base 3119 reaches the tip (second appearance position) on the opposite side of the second movable range. When the second transmission member 3108 rotates and moves away from the second specific rotation range, the second movable base 3119 enters a state where the movement is stopped at the tip of the second movable range.

  When the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 that is rotatably attached to the second movable base 3119 is attached to the rack that is attached to the first movable base 3116. The member 3115 moves while rotating along the rack gear 3115a. Since the back upper decorative body 3152 is attached to the decorative body rotating gear 3120, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decorative body 3152 rotates and moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. It becomes.

  In this state, by reversely rotating the backside drive motor 3103, the second movable base 3119 and the first movable base 3116, that is, the backside decorative body 3152 are moved in the initial state by performing the reverse movement to the above. Can be returned to.

  Thus, according to this embodiment, since the 1st movable base 3116 and the 2nd movable base 3119 can be moved separately, the movement which moves to a back decoration body 3152 in two steps is provided. The back upper decorative body 3152 can be complicatedly moved. In addition, as a movable effect of the backside decorative body 3152, by moving only the first movable base 3116 or by moving the second movable base 3119 after the first movable base 3116 is moved, there are various patterns of movable effects. Therefore, it is possible to make the moving effect of the backside decorative body 3152 hard to get tired of, and to make the player entertained and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decorative body 3152 is rotated downward together with the second movable base 3119 while rotating, so that more various movements are given to the back upper decorative body 3152. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are slid in the same vertical direction, and the back upper decorative body 3152 can be moved a longer distance in the same direction. The impact of the movable performance by 3152 can be increased, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the rotation from the first transmission member 3107 is once transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, the first movable base 3116 is moved by the first transmitted member 3117. The circumference of the first specific rotation range in the member 3107 can be amplified by the first transmitted member 3117, and the first movable range from the retracted position of the first movable base 3116 to the first appearance position is made larger. The back decorative body 3152 that moves greatly can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the back upper decoration body 3152 can be complicatedly moved only by one back drive motor 3103, for example, the first movable base 3116 is provided with another drive motor that moves the second movable base 3119. Since the number of drive motors can be reduced as compared with the case where the first movable base 3116 is not provided with a drive motor, the number of drive motors can be reduced. A load (weight) acting on one movable base 3116 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the first movable base 3116 with a drive motor for the second movable base 3119, the back decorative body 3152 can be made larger (heavy) by the weight of the drive motor. The impact on the player can be increased by the complicated movement of the back upper decorative body 3152, and something can be done to the player by the complicated movement of the large back upper decorative body 3152 in two stages. It can be thought that there is a good thing, it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component member 1100 Game panel 1500 Central liquid crystal display device 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3100 Back movable movable unit 3101 Unit base 3103 Back Upper drive motor (drive motor)
3104 Drive gear 3105 1st driven gear 3106 2nd driven gear 3107 1st transmission member 3107a 1st transmission gear 3107b 1st transmission pin 3107c 1st lock | rock protrusion 3107d First notch part 3108 2nd transmission member 3108a 2nd transmission gear 3108b 2nd transmission pin 3108c 2nd lock | rock protrusion 3108d 2nd notch 3115 Rack member 3115a Rack gear (decoration body rack gear)
3116 1st movable base 3117 1st to-be-transmitted member 3117a 1st board | substrate part 3117b 1st action pin 3117c 1st to-be-transmitted main-body part 3117d 1st transmission slit 3117e 1st lock | rock recessed part 3119 2nd movable base 3120 Decorative body rotation gear 3122 1st Second transmitted member 3122a Second substrate portion 3122b Second transmitted body portion 3122c Second transmitted slit 3122d Second lock recess 3122e First transmission guide portion 3123 Rotating link member 3123a Link body portion 3123b First transmitted guide portion 3123d Second Transmission guide portion 3124 Second movable base drive member 3124a Second action pin 3124b Drive main body portion 3124c Second transmitted guide portion 3125 Shaft member 3150 Backside decorative body unit (decorative body)
3151 Decorative body base 3152 Decorative body on the back (decorative body)
1510 1st hold number display area 1521 Hold image (first)
1522 Reserved image (second)
1523 Reserved image (third)
1524 Reserved image (4th)
1580 Second reserved number display area 1600a Left decorative design 1600b Middle decorative design 1600c Right decorative design

Claims (1)

A start opening in which a game ball rolling down the game area can enter,
Display means for displaying decorative designs;
A variable display game execution means for executing a variable display game for stopping and displaying after changing the decorative design based on the reception of the game ball at the start opening;
Lottery means for performing lottery in response to the reception of the game ball at the start port;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, specific game state generating means for generating a specific game state advantageous to the player;
An effect control means for controlling the effect along with the variable display game based on the reception of the game ball at the start opening,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The production control means includes
Whether or not to perform a notice effect suggesting a reliability indicating the possibility of generating the specific gaming state across a plurality of variation effects by the decoration symbol in the variation display game based on a lottery result by the lottery means A notice effect determining means for determining
When the notice lottery information storage means storing the notice lottery information for determining the notice effect mode based on the predetermined information and the notice effect determining means decide to perform the notice effect, the number of times the notice is executed is determined. A means for determining the number of notices to be determined;
Corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-notice-notifying means, a notice effect mode to be executed is selected from the notice lottery information based on the predetermined information, and the selected notice effect mode is corresponded to the number of times. Notice effect mode determining means for determining;
A notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect suggesting the reliability by sequentially executing notices determined corresponding to the number of times over a plurality of fluctuation effects by the decorative design,
With
When determining the advance notice corresponding to the number of times, the advance notice effect mode determining means does not lower the reliability of the advance notice effect mode executed at a later number of times than the notice effect type executed at a later number of times. To determine the notice effect mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.